Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

1 of 163
1 of 163

Summary of Content for Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual PDF

IMPORTANT Check Your Power Supply

Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage speci- fied on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage se- lector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a minus screwdriver to rotate the se- lector dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

WICHTIG Netzspannung berprfen

Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem An- schlieen an das Stromnetz, da die rtliche Netzspannung den Betriebs- spannungswerten auf dem Typenschild an der Unterseite des Instruments ent- spricht. In bestimmten Verkaufs- gebieten ist das Instrument mit einem Spannungswhler an der Unterseite neben der Netzkabeldurchfhrung aus- gestattet. Falls vorhanden, mu der Spannungswhler auf die rtliche Netz- spannung eingestellt werden. Der Spannungswhler wurde werkseitig auf 240 V voreingestellt. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungsregler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der Zeiger auf den korrekten Spannungs- wert weist

IMPORTANT Vrifiez la source dalimentation Vrifiez que la tension spcifie sur le panneau arrire correspond la tension du secteur. Dans certaines rgions, linstrument peut tre quip dun slecteur de tension situ sur le panneau infrieur du clavier proximit du cordon dalimentation. Vrifiez que ce slecteur est bien rgl en fonction de la tension sec- teur de votre rgion. Le slecteur de tension est rgl sur 240 V au d- part dusine. Pour modifier ce r- glage, utilisez un tournevis lame plate pour tourner le slecteur afin de mettre lindication correspondant la tension de votre rgion vis vis du repre triangulaire situ sur le panneau.

IMPORTANTE Compruebe la alimentacin de su rea Asegrese de que tensin de alimen- tacin de CA de su rea correspon- de con la tensin especificada en la placa de caractersticas del panel inferior de la unidad del teclado prin- cipal, cerca del cable de alimenta- cin. Asegrese de que el selector de tensin est ajustado a la tensin de su rea. El selector de tensin se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fbrica. Para cambiar el ajus- te, emplee un destornillador de ca- beza recta para girar el selector de modo que aparezca la tensin co- rrecta al lado del indicador del pa- nel.

Battery Notice: This product MAY contain a small non- rechargeable battery which (if applicable) is soldered in place. The average life span of this type of battery is ap- proximately five years. When replacement becomes neces- sary, contact a qualified service representative to perform the replacement.

Warning: Do not attempt to recharge, disassemble, or incinerate this type of battery. Keep all batteries away from children. Dispose of used batteries promptly and as regulated by applicable laws. Note: In some areas, the servicer is required by law to return the defective parts. However, you do have the option of having the servicer dispose of these parts for you.

Disposal Notice: Should this product become damaged beyond repair, or for some reason its useful life is consid- ered to be at an end, please observe all local, state, and federal regulations that relate to the disposal of products that contain lead, batteries, plastics, etc.

NOTICE: Service charges incurred due to lack of knowl- edge relating to how a function or effect works (when the unit is operating as designed) are not covered by the manufacturers warranty, and are therefore the owners responsibility. Please study this manual carefully and con- sult your dealer before requesting service.

NAME PLATE LOCATION: The graphic below indi- cates the location of the name plate. The model number, serial number, power requirements, etc., are located on this plate. You should record the model number, serial number, and the date of purchase in the spaces provided below and retain this manual as a permanent record of your purchase.

PRODUCT SAFETY MARKINGS: Yamaha electronic products may have either labels similar to the graphics shown below or molded/stamped facsimiles of these graphics on the enclosure. The explanation of these graph- ics appears on this page. Please observe all cautions indi- cated on this page and those indicated in the safety in- struction section.

SPECIAL MESSAGE SECTION

Model _____________________________________

Serial No. __________________________________

Purchase Date _____________________________

CAUTION RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK

DO NOT OPEN

CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK. DO NOT REMOVE COVER (OR BACK).

NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE. REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.

See bottom of Keyboard enclosure for graphic symbol markings

92-469-

CVP-79A

CVP-69/69A

CVP-59S

The exclamation point with the equilat- eral triangle is intended to alert the user to the presence of important operating and maintenance (servicing) instruc- tions in the literature accompanying the product.

The lightning flash with arrowhead symbol within the equilateral triangle is intended to alert the user to the pres- ence of uninsulated dangerous volt- age within the products enclosure that may be of sufficient magnitude to con- stitute a risk of electrical shock.

IMPORTANT NOTICE: All Yamaha electronic products are tested and approved by an independent safety testing laboratory in order that you may be sure that when it is properly installed and used in its normal and customary manner, all foreseeable risks have been eliminated. DO NOT modify this unit or commission others to do so un- less specifically authorized by Yamaha. Product perform- ance and/or safety standards may be diminished. Claims filed under the expressed warranty may be denied if the unit is/has been modified. Implied warranties may also be affected.

SPECIFICATIONS SUBJECT TO CHANGE: The information contained in this manual is believed to be correct at the time of printing. However, Yamaha reserves the right to change or modify any of the specifications without notice or obligation to update existing units.

ENVIRONMENTAL ISSUES: Yamaha strives to pro- duce products that are both user safe and environmentally friendly. We sincerely believe that our products and the production methods used to produce them, meet these goals. In keeping with both the letter and the spirit of the law, we want you to be aware of the following:

Introduction

Thank you for choosing a Yamaha Clavinova. Your Clavinova is a fine musical instrument that employs advanced Yamaha music technology. With the proper care, your Clavinova will give you many years of musical pleasure.

Large LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel and a consistent control interface make operation easy and efficient.

AWM (Advanced Wave Memory) tone generator system offers an extensive range of rich, realistic voices.

A maximum of 32-note polyphony (64-note polyphony on the CVP-79A) permits use of sophisticated playing techniques.

Piano-like touch response provides extensive expressive control and outstanding playability.

Dual and split play modes allow 2 voices to be played simultaneously or individually with the left and right hands.

100 exciting accompaniment styles can be used to provide rhythm-only accompa- niment or fully-orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment. Optional Style File disks provide additional accompaniment styles.

Custom Style lets you create original accompaniment patterns that can be recalled and played in the same way as the presets.

Full-keyboard ABC (Auto Bass Chord) provides accompaniment as you play across the entire keyboard.

16 Harmony variations make it simple to produce rich, complex harmonies.

One-touch Setting Feature automatically sets the ideal voices and other param- eters for the selected accompaniment style.

16-track built-in sequencer records and plays back your keyboard performances.

Digital reverb and effects add extra ambiance and depth to your sound.

Registration Memory memorizes 25 (15 in the case of the CVP-59S) complete control-panel setups that you can recall whenever needed.

Internal 3.5" floppy disk drive provides extended Song Record capacity and Disk Orchestra Collection disk playback capability.

Disk Orchestra Collection playback capability lets you practice complete songs with full accompaniment while keyboard guide lamps help beginners find the right keys.

MIDI compatibility, GM voices, and a range of MIDI functions make the Clavinova useful in a range of advanced MIDI music systems.

In order to make the most of your Clavinovas performance potential and features, we urge you to read this Owners Manual thoroughly, and keep it in a safe place for later reference.

The LCD displays as illustrated in this manual are for instructional purposes only, and may appear some- what different from yours.

1

Contents

Taking Care of Your Clavinova ............... 2

Preparation 3

The Music Stand .................................... 3

The Key Cover (CVP-79A/69/69A) ........ 3

The Power Switch .................................. 3

Headphones ........................................... 3

The Panel Controls 4

The Volume Controls 6

Master Volume ....................................... 6

ABC/Song Volume ................................. 6

Other Volume Controls ........................... 7

Expression Control (CVP-79A only) ....... 7

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls 8

The Display & LCD Buttons ................... 8

The [DISPLAY HOLD] Button ................ 9

The PAGE [<] and [>] Buttons ........... 10

The [MIXER] Button ............................. 10

The [EXIT] Button ................................. 10

The [CONTRAST] Button ..................... 11

The Help Function ................................ 11

Memory Backup ................................... 12

Demonstration Playback 13

Voice Selection 15

Keyboard Percussion ............................ 16

The Keyboard & Polyphony .............. 16

Dual Mode 17

Engaging the Dual Mode & Selecting the 2nd Voice ....................... 17

Dual-mode Voice Balance .................... 18

Detune Depth ....................................... 18

Split Mode 19

Engaging the Split Mode ...................... 19

Changing the Split Voices .................... 19

Split-mode Voice Balance .................... 20

Changing the Split Point ....................... 21

Digital Reverb 22

Selecting a Reverb Type ...................... 22

Total Depth Control .............................. 23

Individual Part Depth Control ............... 23

Voice Effects 24

Selecting a Voice Effect ....................... 24

Effect Depth Control ............................. 25

One-touch Preset Recall ...................... 25

The Pedals 26

Right Pedal (Damper Pedal) ................ 26

Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal CVP-79A/69/69A only) ......................... 26

Left Pedal (Multi-function) .................... 27

Accompaniment 28

Style Selection ..................................... 28

Tempo Control ..................................... 29

Starting the Accompaniment ................ 30

Fill-ins ................................................... 32

Left-pedal Break ................................... 32

Stopping the Accompaniment .............. 32

Metronome ........................................... 33

Auto Bass Chord (ABC) 34

Single-Finger, Fingered Chord, and Full Keyboard Accompaniment ............ 34

Overall Accompaniment Volume Control .................................................. 37

Individual Part Volume Control ............. 38

Small ABC ............................................ 39

Changing the ABC Split Point .............. 39

Chord Assist ......................................... 40

Harmony ............................................... 41

One Touch Setting ............................... 44

Custom Style 45

Other Custom Style Functions ............. 50

Playing Back Your Custom Styles ........ 52

Custom Style Alert & Error Displays .... 53

Style File Load 55

Loading Disk Styles .............................. 55

Using Loaded Style Files ..................... 57

Registration Memory 58

Recall the Registered Panel Settings ................................................ 60

The ABC Freeze Function .................... 60

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback 61

Straight Playback ................................. 61

Playing Back Specific Parts ................. 63

Part Assignment for Original Song Playback ............................................... 65

Overall Song Playback Volume Control .................................................. 65

Individual Part Volume Control & Voice Selection .................................... 66

Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice ................................................ 67

Repeat Functions ................................. 69

Other Playback Controls ...................... 70

Playing Other Types of Music Data ...... 71

Song Recording 72

Quick Recording .................................... 72

Multi-track Recording & Playback ........ 75

Adding New Tracks .............................. 77

Punch-in/out Recording ........................ 78

The Chord Sequence Function ............. 80

Chord Sequence Page 2 & 3 Functions .............................................. 81

Other Song Recording Functions ........ 83

Track Mix .............................................. 83

Track Delete ......................................... 84

Track Quantize ..................................... 84

Initial Edit .............................................. 85

Renaming Song Files ........................... 87

Recording Without a Disk ..................... 89

Playback ............................................... 89

The Utility Functions 90

Keyboard .............................................. 91

Sound ................................................... 92

Pedal .................................................... 92

MIDI 1 ................................................... 94

MIDI 2 ................................................... 95

MIDI 3 ................................................... 97

Format .................................................. 98

Registration .......................................... 99

Transform ........................................... 101

Song Copy ......................................... 102

Song Delete ....................................... 104

Micro Tuning ...................................... 104

Backup ............................................... 107

Recall ................................................. 108

Popup Time ........................................ 109

Song List Priority ................................ 109

Alert Sound ........................................ 109

Messages 110

The Connectors 113

Troubleshooting 114

Options 114

Index ...................................................... 115

Voice List .............................................. 116

Style List ............................................... 120

Drum/key Assignment List .................. 121

Backed Up Parameters ........................ 122

Fingering Chart .................................... 123

MIDI Data Format ................................. 124

Specifications ....................................... 135

CVP-79A: Assembly ............................. 136

CVP-69/69A: Assembly ........................ 142

CVP-59S: Assembly ............................. 150

MIDI Implementation Chart ................. 156

2

Taking Care of Your Clavinova Your Clavinova will give you years of playing pleasure if you observe the simple rules given below:

1. Avoid Humidity & Heat Avoid placing the Clavinova in areas that are subject to excessive humidity or heat. Do not leave the instrument near heaters or in a car exposed to direct sunlight, for example.

2. Avoid Dust & Moisture Avoid locations in which the instrument is likely to be exposed to excessive dust or moisture.

3. Power-off Before Connecting Connections between the Clavinova and any other device must be made with both pieces of equipment turned off.

4. Handle With Care Never apply excessive force to the controls, connectors or other parts of your Clavinova, and avoid scratching or bumping it with hard objects. Further, always turn the POWER switch off after use, and close the key cover to protect the keyboard (CVP-79A/ 69/69A), or cover the instrument with the dust cover provided (CVP-59S).

5. Clean Carefully Clean the cabinet and keys of your Clavinova only with a clean, slightly damp cloth. A neutral cleanser may be used if desired. Never use abrasive cleansers, waxes, solvents or chemical dust cloths since these can dull or damage the finish.

6. Never Tamper With the Internal Circuitry Never open the Clavinova cabinet and touch or tamper with the internal circuitry. Tampering with the circuitry can result in electri- cal shock!

7. Electric Interference Since the Clavinova contains digital circuitry, it may cause inter- ference if placed too close to radio or television receivers. If this occurs, move the instrument further away from the affected equipment.

8. Check Your Power Supply Make sure that your local AC mains voltage matches the voltage specified on the name plate on the bottom panel. In some areas a voltage selector may be provided on the bottom panel of the main keyboard unit near the power cord. Make sure that the voltage selector is set for the voltage in your area. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. To change the setting use a minus screwdriver to rotate the selec- tor dial so that the correct voltage appears next to the pointer on the panel.

9. Name Plate Location The Clavinova name plate, including the units serial number, is located on the bottom panel of the main unit.

10.Handling Floppy Disks Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection disks are write-protected and therefore cannot be used to save songs. To save your recorded songs a blank floppy disk should be used (one blank disk is sup- plied with the Clavinova).

Taking Care of Your Floppy Disks Do NOT eject the disk during recording or playback, or at any

time when the disk drive lamp is lit. Doing so may damage both the disk and the FDD.

Do NOT turn the Clavinova on or off while the disk is in the drive.

Always eject the disk before turning the Clavinova off. When ejecting a floppy disk from the disk drive:

To eject a floppy disk, press the eject button slowly as far as it will go. Then when the disk Is fully ejected, remove it by hand.

The disk may not be ejected properly if the eject button is pressed too quickly or if it is not pressed in far enough. (The eject button may become stuck halfway with the disk extending from the slot by only a few millimeters). If this is the case, do not attempt to pull out the partially ejected disk. Doing so may damage the disk drive mechanism and/or the floppy disk. To remove a partially ejected disk, try pressing the eject button once again or push the disk back into the slot, then repeat the eject procedure carefully.

Never open or close the key cover while a disk is extending from the drive (i.e. in the ejected position). The key cover may contact the disk, possibly damaging the disk or even the disk drive.

Do not insert anything but floppy disks into the disk drive. Other objects may cause damage to the disk drive or floppy disk.

Use the 3.5-inch 2DD or 2HD floppy disks with the Clavinova.

Precautions Regarding Floppy Disk Use Never open the disks shutter. Dirt or dust on the Internal

magnetic surface will cause data errors. Never leave disks near a speaker, TV, or other device that

emits a strong magnetic field. Do not store disks in places exposed to direct sunlight or

sources of high temperature.

Do not place heavy objects such as books on top of a disk. Avoid getting the disks wet. Be sure to store the disks in environmental conditions as

specified below: Storage temperature: 4 to 53C (39 to 127F). Storage humidity: 8 to 90% relative humidity. Store in an area free from dust, sand, smoke, etc.

Be sure to apply the disk label at the proper position. When changing the label never cover the old label with a new label; always remove the old label first.

Head Cleaning The head of the disk drive unit will get dirty as you use it even- tually causing data errors. If this occurs, clean the head with a 3.5 inch head cleaning disk (available from most computer supply stores).

Data Backup It is recommended that you copy your recorded songs to another disk for backup (see page 102). If the original disk is damaged or your song is deleted, the backup disk can be used instead of the original.

Protecting Your Data (Write Protect Tab)

Write protect tab closed (unlocked write enabled)

Write protect tab open (locked write protected)

Disk drive lamp

3

The Music Stand

If you will be using sheet music with your Clavinova, raise the mu- sic stand built into its top panel by lifting the rear edge of the music stand. Flip down the braces on either side of the rear of the music stand so that they catch inside the protrusions on the top panel. Reverse this operation o lower the stand.

Preparation

Headphones One or two standard pairs of stereo headphones can be plugged in

here for private practice or late-night playing. The internal speaker sys- tem is automatically shut off when a pair of headphones is plugged into either or both of the PHONES jacks.

CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

PHONES

The Key Cover (CVP-79A/69/69A)

To open the CVP-79A/69/69A key cover lift it just enough to clear the keys (do not lift excessively) then slide the cover back into the main unit. To close the cover slide it forward all the way and then lower it gently until it closes completely.

The Power Switch

After making sure that the Clavinovas AC cord is properly plugged into the Clavinova itself and plugged into a convenient AC wall outlet (a power-plug adaptor may be provided in some areas), press the [POWER] switch located to the left of the keyboard once to turn the power on. Press the [POWER] switch again to turn the power off.

When the power is initially turned on, the PIANO voice selector indicator will light, the POP style selector indicator will light, and the display will appear as shown to the left.

POWER

CVP-79A

4

The Panel Controls

AUTO BASS CHORD Section

9 [INTRO A/FILL TO A] Button ................ page 30, 32

0 [INTRO B/FILL TO B] Button ................ page 30, 32

! [MAIN A] Button.................................... page 30, 31

@ [MAIN B] Button.................................... page 30, 31

# [ENDING] Button .........................................page 32

$ [SMALL ABC] Button ...................................page 39

% [ABC ON] Button .........................................page 35

^ [METRONOME] Button ............................... page 33

& TEMPO [] and [] Buttons ......................page 29

START/STOP Section

* [TAP] Button.................................................page 31

( [SYNCHRO] Button ..................................... page 31

) [START/STOP] Button .................... page 14, 30, 32

Display Control Section

q [CONTRAST] Button ...................................page 11

w BEAT Display ...............................................page 31

e [FUNCTION] Button .................................... page 90

r [MIXER] Button ....................................... page 7, 10

t PAGE [<] and [>] Buttons .......................... page 10

C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A1 B1 C2 D2 E2 F2 G2 A2 B2 C3 D3 E3B0A0G0F0E0D0C0B-1A-1

POWER

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

CANCEL

1

2 3 4

5

6 7

8

^ & q

w

re

u

j

y i$ % * ( ) t9 0 ! @ #

PHONES

CVP-79A

S

1 POWER Switch ............................................. page 3

VOLUME Section

2MASTER VOLUME Control ........................... page 6

3 ABC/SONG VOLUME Control ......... page 6, 37, 65

4 [DEMO/HELP] Button ........................... page 11, 13

5 [REVERB] Button ........................................page 22

STYLE Section

6 STYLE Selectors ............................ page 13, 28, 45

7 [HARMONY] Button ....................................page 41

8 [ONE TOUCH SETTING] Button................. page 44

THRU IN

MIDI OUT

AUX INAUX OUT L/L+R RL/L+R R

THRU IN

MIDI OUT

EXP PEDAL AUX INAUX OUT

L/L+R RL/L+R R

IN

MIDI OUT

AUX INAUX OUT L/L+R RL/L+R R

CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S

D F G H D F H D F H

P H

O N

E S S

CVP-69/69A/59S

5

The Panel Controls

y [DISPLAY HOLD] Button ............................... page 9

uDisplay ........................................................... page 8

i LCD Buttons .................................................. page 8

oData dial ........................................................ page 8

p [EXIT] Button ...............................................page 10

Q [+] and [] Buttons ......................................... page 8

SONG Section

W [PLAY] Button ..............................................page 61

E [RECORD] Button ....................................... page 73

R [GUIDE] Button ............................................page 67

SONG CONTROL Section

T [REW] Button ........................................ page 70, 78

Y [FF] Button ............................................ page 70, 78

U [PAUSE] Button .................................... page 70, 78

VOICE Section

I VOICE Selectors .................................. page 13, 15

O [DUAL] Button..............................................page 17

P [SPLIT] Button .............................................page 19

a [EFFECT] Button .........................................page 24

REGISTRATION Section

s [MEMORY] Button .......................................page 59

d [BANK] Button .............................................page 59

f [REGISTRATION 1~5] Button .............. page 59, 60

g [ABC FREEZE] Button ................................page 60

h 3.5" Floppy Disk Drive .............. page 55, 61, 72, 98

j Keyboard......................................................page 16

k Keyboard Guide Lamps...............................page 67

l Soft Pedal ....................................................page 27

; Sostenuto Pedal (CVP-79A/69/69A)...........page 26

ADamper Pedal ..............................................page 26

S PHONES Jacks ............................................. page 3

D AUX OUT R and L/L+R Jacks ...................page 113

F AUX IN R and L/L+R Jacks .......................page 113

G EXP PEDAL Jack (CVP-79A) .............. page 7, 113

HMIDI Connectors .......................................page 113

F3 G3 A3 B3 C4 D4 E4 F4 G4 A4 B4 C5 D5 E5 F5 G5 A5 B5 C6 D6 E6 F6 G6 A6 B6 C7

EXIT + MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

o W E R

I O a

P

h

s d f g k

p Q T Y U

CVP-79A

A; l

CVP-69/69A

A ;

l CVP-59S

A l

6

The Volume Controls

The Clavinova has two volume controls on the control panel in addition to several programmable volume levels that give you extra versatility in creating the required sound.

ABC/Song Volume

This control adjusts the volume of the Clavinovas auto-accompani- ment and song playback sound. The volume of notes played on the key- board is not affected.

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

Master Volume

The MASTER VOLUME control adjusts the overall volume of sound produced by the Clavinova. It also adjusts headphone volume when one or two pairs of headphones are plugged into the PHONES jacks.

Initially set the MASTER VOLUME control about half way between the MIN and MAX settings. Then, when you start playing, adjust the control for the most comfortable listening level.

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

The output signal levels from the AUX OUT jacks are also adjusted by the MASTER VOLUME control.

7

Other Volume Controls

The [MIXER] button provides access to individual volume param- eters for the rhythm, bass, chord, pad, and phrase parts of the auto ac- companiment sound, a keyboard volume parameter, and a volume param- eter for the Clavinovas harmony function see page 41 for details. When the Clavinovas Disk Orchestra Collection playback function is in use the [MIXER] button accesses individual volume parameters for each Disk Orchestra Collection part.

The Volume Controls

FUNCTION MIXER

Expression Control (CVP-79A only)

An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller can be plugged into the CVP-79A EXP PEDAL jack for foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e. expression doesnt affect the auto-accompani- ment sound). Press the pedal forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume.

EXP PEDAL

8

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls

In addition to a range of direct-operation buttons, the CVP-79A/69/ 69A/59S features a large LCD (Liquid Crystal Display) panel and several related controls that comprise a consistent interface that, once understood, can make operation and programming easier than ever.

The Display & LCD Buttons

The 5 buttons below the display well call them LCD buttons throughout this text select or edit the parameter indicated by the adja- cent section of the display.

In the example display shown here, for example, the two buttons im- mediately below the VOICE section of the display can be used to select the voice to be played via the keyboard. When either of the VOICE but- tons is pressed the VOICE section of the display will be highlighted (as in the example), indicating that the data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used to select voices. The LCD buttons can be pressed briefly to sin- gle-step the corresponding parameter, or held to scroll continuously through the parameters values. The panel [+]/[] buttons allow single- step operation only.

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

+

9

In many cases where and or < and > LCD buttons appear, both buttons can be pressed simultaneously to recall the default setting for that parameter. The panel [+] and [] buttons can be used in the same way. This applies to most parameters that have a range of possible settings. Parameters of this type are enclosed in a rounded frame in the display.

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls

Parameters which are directly executed or simply switched on or off via the corresponding LCD button appear in a square frame and are not editable via the data dial and [+]/[] buttons.

The [DISPLAY HOLD] Button

When selecting voices (page 15) or accompaniment styles (page 28), for example, the voice or style list that appears when a VOICE or STYLE button is pressed will automatically disappear after a few sec- onds if no selections are made. When this type of temporary pop-up display is selected, the [DISPLAY HOLD] button will flash indicating that the display will disappear in a few seconds. Pop-up displays can be kept on the LCD for as long as required by pressing the [DISPLAY HOLD] button so that its indicator lights continuously. Press [DISPLAY HOLD] a second time (the indicator will go out) to disengage the dis- play hold function.

If the [DISPLAY HOLD] button is en- gaged when a normal display is show- ing, no pop-up displays will appear even when a button that normally calls a pop-up display is pressed.

The length of time pop-up displays remain on the LCD can be set via the Pop-up Time function described on page 109.

DISPLAY HOLD

10

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls

The PAGE [<] and [>] Buttons

Many functions have several display pages that can be selected by using the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons. When more than one page is pro- vided for the selected function or group of functions, a corresponding number of overlapping page icons will appear in the upper right-hand corner of the display, and the number of the currently selected page will appear in the top page icon.

The [MIXER] Button

This button calls the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S mixer display which in- cludes individual volume parameters for the auto-accompaniment RHYTHM, BASS, CHORD, PAD, and PHRASE parts. These param- eters can be used to the achieve the best overall balance for your musical needs (see page 38 for details). The mixer parameters will disappear when the [MIXER] button is pressed a second time (or the [EXIT] but- ton is pressed).

The [EXIT] Button

The [EXIT] button will usually take you out of the current mode, back to the previous display often the initial play mode display.

FUNCTION MIXER

EXIT

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

11

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls

The [CONTRAST] Button

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S display panel is a liquid-crystal type which can be adjusted for optimum legibility. Press the [CONTRAST] button and use the DARK and LIGHT LCD buttons (or data dial or [+]/ [] buttons) to set the display contrast for optimum legibility. The con- trast setting retained in memory even when the Clavinova power is turned off.

CONTRAST

Press the [CONTRAST] button again or [EXIT] button to exit from the LCD CONTRAST display.

If youre ever in doubt about a function, the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S HELP function is always available. Press the [DEMO/HELP] button and then the HELP LCD button at any time to enter the help mode.

If necessary use the first LCD button to select the language (ENG- LISH, GERMAN, FRENCH or JAPANESE) you want help in. The lan- guage setting is retained in memory even when the Clavinova power is turned off. Use the SELECT buttons to select a topic, then press the ENTER button to view the first page of help text on the selected topic.

The Help Function

DEMO/HELP

12

General Operation: The Display & Related Controls

Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons, the [+] and [] buttons, or the data dial to flip through the available pages.

The [EXIT] or [DEMO/HELP] button will take you back to the topic list if pressed while the help text is showing, or back to the initial play mode display if pressed while the topic list is showing.

In addition to the contrast and language settings introduced in this section, the Clavinova has a range of parameters that can be retained in memory even while the power is off, so you dont have to reset all your favorite settings every time you want to play. The Backup function described on page 107 lets you select which parameters will be backed up (retained in memory), and which will be reset to their default values whenever the power is turned off.

Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main- tained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.

Memory Backup

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

13

The Clavinova features 25 demonstration tunes that effectively demonstrate its sound and accompaniment capabilities. Heres how you can select and play the demo tunes.

Demonstration Playback

VSelect a Demo Tune ........................................................................................

The demo tunes are selected via the first two LCD buttons, and the VOICE and STYLE selectors. The VOICE and STYLE indicators flash in sequence when the [DEMO/HELP] button is pressed.

Demo tune playback data is not trans- mitted via the MIDI OUT terminal.

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ ORGAN

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC.

CLAVI. TONE/ SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICESTYLE

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

DEMO/HELP

ZTurn Power On and Set an Initial Volume Level ...............

Press the [POWER] button to turn the power ON, and set the [MAS- TER VOLUME] control about half way between the MIN and MAX settings.

XPress the [DEMO/HELP] button ........................................................

DEMO/HELP

CSelect a Play Mode ..........................................................................................

Use the fourth LCD button to select a play mode:

ALL All 25 demo tunes will repeatedly play back in sequence, start- ing with the tune you initially select.

RANDOM All 25 demo tunes will continuously play back in random order, starting with the tune you initially select.

SINGLE The selected tune will play through once, then demo playback will stop.

14

Demonstration Playback

Press an LCD button or selector to start playback of the correspond- ing tune. You can also start playback from the first LCD tune by pressing the [START/STOP] button when the ALL or SINGLE play mode is selected. The corresponding LCD section will be highlighted during LCD tune playback, and the VOICE or STYLE indicator will flash dur- ing voice or style tune playback.

BAdjust the Volume ............................................................................................

Use the MASTER VOLUME control to adjust the volume.

NStop Playback ......................................................................................................

Demo playback can be stopped temporarily by pressing the LCD but- ton, VOICE button, or STYLE button corresponding to the demo tune which is currently playing, or by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the [DEMO/HELP] or [EXIT] button when you want to stop demo playback and return to the normal mode.

The Demo Tunes Title Composers

Song Demo

1 Piano Concerto No.1 op.23 1st movement Peter Ilyich Tchaikovsky

2 A Whole New World from the motion picture Aladdin Alan Menken

Voice Demo

Piano Polonaise No.6 op.53 Heroique Frdric Franois Chopin

Harpsi. Sonata in C major K.159 (L.104) Domenico Scarlatti

Vibes Wonderland Hiroaki Fujita

Guitar Concierto de Aranjuez 2nd movement Joaquin Rodrigo

Clavi. Tone/Synth No, Only He Who Has Known Peter Ilyich Tchaikovsky

Organ Toccata and Fuga in D minor Johann Sebastian Bach

Strings/Choir Symphony No. 5 op.67 1st movement Ludwig van Beethoven

Brass La Rjouissance from Music For The Royal Fireworks Georg Friedrich Hndel

Sax/Flute I Left My Heart In San Francisco George Cory

Style Demo

Pop My Way J. Revaux, C. Franois & G. Thibaut

Latin Sabor A Mi Alvaro Carrillo

Latin Pop The Girl From Ipanema Antonio Carlos Jobin

Traditional I Could Have Danced All Night Frederic Loewe

Waltz Tennessee Waltz Pee Wee King & Redd Stewart

During voice or style tune playback, the currently playing voice or style name will be shown on the display.

Some of the demonstration pieces listed above are specially-arranged excerpts from the original compositions listed above. All other songs are original (1995 by Yamaha Corporation).

The tempo cannot be adjusted during demo playback.

15

The CVP-69/69A/59S has a total of 172 different voices and the CVP- 79A has 192 that can be selected and played via the keyboard. Theres also a Keyboard Percussion mode that lets you play a range of drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard.

Voice Selection

ZSelect a Voice ........................................................................................................

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S voices are organized in 12 voice groups (see page 116 for a complete voice list). Use the voice group buttons to select the group from which you want to select a voice. The correspond- ing voice display will appear.

The display will automatically revert to the main play mode display after a few seconds if the [DISPLAY HOLD] button is not engaged (page 9).

The last voice selected within each group will automatically be recalled whenever a VOICE button is pressed (as long as the power remains on). The last-selected voice in each group can be backed up, even after the power is turned off, via the Backup function page 107.

The Grand Piano 1 voice is automati- cally selected when the power is ini- tially turned on. However the last-selected voice can be recalled when the power is turned off and on via the Backup function page 107.

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

Use the PAGE buttons to select the page containing the voice you want if more than one page is available, then press the LCD button corre- sponding to the desired voice. You can also use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select any of the voices within the selected group.

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC.

CLAVI. TONE/ SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

Voices within the current group can still be selected via the VOICE and LCD buttons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons, once the VOICE section of the display has been highlighted, from the main play mode display.

16

Voice Selection

The Keyboard & Polyphony

The CVP-69/69A/59S can play up to 32 notes at once while the CVP-79A can play up to 64. This number includes all notes being played at the same time in any single or combination use of dual, split, accompani- ment, and disk functions. Further variation occurs with 1-element and 2-element voices: the polyphony is halved with 2-element voices. The same applies to stereo voices. The voice list on page 116 shows all stereo, 2-element, and 1-element voices in the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S.

The Clavinova also offers keyboard touch response, so the volume and timbre of notes played can be con- trolled according to how hard you play the keys. The amount of variation available depends on the selected voice and the setting of the TOUCH SENSITIVITY parameter (page 91).

Keyboard Percussion

The Clavinova has 8 Drum Kits in the [DRUMS/PERC.] voice group which includes a range of drum and percussion voices as well as sound effects. When one of the Drum Kit voices is selected, you can play 72 different drums and percussion instruments on the keyboard. The drums and percussion instruments played by the various keys when the Stand- ard Kit is selected are marked by symbols above the keys.

See page 121 for a complete list of the instruments in each Drum Kit.

When a Drum Kit voice is selected only the keys with drum or percussion symbols printed above them will sound.

The TRANSPOSE, TUNE, and OC- TAVE SHIFT functions described on pages 91 and 92 do not affect the Drum Kit voices.

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

XPlay & Adjust Volume...................................................................................

You can now play the selected voice on the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S keyboard. Use the [MASTER VOLUME] control to adjust the overall volume level.

17

The DUAL mode makes it possible to play two voices simultane- ously across the entire range of the keyboard. This makes it easy to create exceptionally rich, thick tonal textures.

Dual Mode

Engaging the Dual Mode & Selecting the 2nd Voice

After selecting the main voice in the normal way, press the [DUAL] button so that its indicator lights to engage the DUAL mode (by pressing again, its indicator goes out and the DUAL mode is disengaged).

Please note that only the VOICE group button indicator of the 2nd voice group lights while the DUAL mode pop-up display is showing, and that only the main voice group indicator lights after the DUAL mode pop-up display disappears.

The default DUAL mode 2nd voice is Strings Slow.

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

DUAL

Use the 2nd VOICE LCD buttons in the DUAL mode pop-up dis- play, that appears when the [DUAL] button is turned on, to select the 2nd dual-mode voice (all voice groups are available). The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the 2nd VOICE section of the display has been highlighted.

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

The VOICE selector indicator of the group containing the 2nd voice lights while the DUAL mode pop-up display is showing, and the 2nd voice group can be selected via the VOICE selectors. The names of both the main and 2nd dual-mode voices appear separated by a + symbol in the normal play mode display even after the DUAL mode pop-up display disappears. A different main voice can be selected in the normal way once the normal play mode display reappears.

18

Dual Mode

The DUAL mode pop-up display can be recalled at any time in order to change the 2nd voice or other settings (see below) by pressing a VOICE selector (either the current voice or another voice to select the 2nd voice) while holding the [DUAL] button.

Dual-mode Voice Balance

The volume balance between the two voices combined in the DUAL mode can be adjusted by pressing the BAL (balance) LCD button to highlight the BAL section of the display, and then by using the data dial and [+]/[] buttons. The BAL LCD button can be held to increase the level of the 2nd voice only. The balance bar in the BAL section of the display graphically shows the volume balance between the main (1st) and 2nd voices. Equal balance can be instantly recalled by pressing the [+] and [] buttons simultaneously while the BAL parameter is selected.

+

Detune Depth

In many cases an even thicker sound can be produced by slightly detuning the dual-mode main and 2nd voices. The DETUNE DEPTH LCD buttons can be used to set the detune depth value between 0 and 10. The data dial and [+]/[] can also be used once the DETUNE DEPTH parameter is selected. The higher the value the greater the amount of detuning. The normal setting of 5 can be instantly recalled by press- ing both the DETUNE DEPTH LCD buttons simultaneously.

The dual and split modes cannot be used at the same time.

The OCTAVE SHIFT function page 91 can be used to shift the pitch of the main and/or 2nd voice in the DUAL mode up or down one octave.

The DUAL mode balance and depth settings affect all voice combinations.

The DUAL mode settings are retained even if the DUAL mode is turned off and on while the power remains on. The DUAL mode settings can also be backed up even after the power is turned off via the Backup function page 107.

The DUAL mode can be turned off by pressing the [DUAL] button so that its indicator goes out.

19

Split Mode

The split mode lets you play different voices with the left and right hands bass with the left and piano with the right, for example. You can assign any of the Clavinovas voices to the left and right- hand sections of the keyboard.

When the [SPLIT] button is pressed and its indicator lights, the key- board is split into left- and right-hand sections and different voices can be assigned to each. (The Split mode can be turned off by pressing the [SPLIT] button again so that its indicator goes out.) The split point is initially set at the F#2 key when the power is turned on, and the Acoustic Bass 1 voice is initially assigned to the left-hand section of the keyboard (all keys up to and including F#2). The voice that was selected when the SPLIT mode was engaged is assigned to the right-hand section of the keyboard.

Engaging the Split Mode

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

SPLIT

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

F 2

C3 C4 C5 C6 C7C2C1C0

Left-hand section

Right-hand section

Changing the Split Voices

Use the LEFT VOICE LCD buttons in the SPLIT mode pop-up dis- play, that appears when the [SPLIT] button is turned on, to select the left-hand voice (all voice groups are available). The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the LEFT VOICE section of the display has been highlighted.

20

Split Mode

The VOICE selector indicator of the group containing the left-hand voice lights while the SPLIT mode pop-up display is showing, and the left-hand voice group can be selected via the VOICE selectors. The names of both the left- and right-hand voices appear separated by a / symbol in the normal play mode display even after the SPLIT mode pop- up display disappears. A different right-hand voice can be selected in the normal way once the normal play mode display reappears.

Please note that only the VOICE group button indicator of the left-hand voice group lights while the SPLIT mode pop-up display is showing, and that only the right-hand voice group indicator lights after the SPLIT mode pop-up display disappears.

Split-mode Voice Balance

The volume balance between the left- and right-hand voices can be adjusted by pressing the BAL (balance) LCD button to highlight the BAL section of the display, and then by using the data dial and [+]/[] buttons. The BAL LCD button can be held to increase the level of the right-hand voice only. The balance bar in the BAL section of the display graphically shows the volume balance between the left- and right-hand voices. Equal balance can be instantly recalled by pressing the [+] and [] buttons si- multaneously while the BAL parameter is selected.

+

The SPLIT mode pop-up display can be recalled at any time in order to change the left-hand voice or other settings (see below) by pressing a VOICE selector (either the current voice or another voice to select the left-hand voice) while holding the [SPLIT] button.

21

Changing the Split Point

The split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding the [SPLIT] button. The split point key name will appear in the SPLIT POINT section of the display.

The split point can also be set by using the SPLIT POINT LCD but- tons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the SPLIT POINT section of the display has been highlighted. The keyboard guide lamp corre- sponding to the selected split point will light.

The dual and split modes cannot be used at the same time.

Whether the damper pedal affects the left voice only, the right voice only, or both voices is determined by the DAMPER RANGE function described on page 93 (the default is right-hand voice only).

The OCTAVE SHIFT function page 91 can be used to shift the pitch of the left- and/or right-hand voice in the SPLIT mode up or down one octave.

When the ABC Single Finger or Fin- gered mode (page 35) and the split mode are used simultaneously, the left-hand voice will be accompanied by the appropriate ABC chord voices.

The SPLIT mode balance and split point settings affect all voice combina- tions.

The SPLIT mode settings are retained even if the SPLIT mode is turned off and on while the power remains on. The SPLIT mode settings can also be backed up even after the power is turned off via the Backup function page 107.

Split Mode

BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHUITAR

The default split point F#2 can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the SPLIT POINT LCD buttons or [+] and [] buttons.

The SPLIT mode can be turned off by pressing the [SPLIT] button so that its indicator goes out.

22

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S provides a number of digital reverb types that you can use for extra ambiance and expressive power.

Digital Reverb

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

REVERB

Selecting a Reverb Type

Press the [REVERB] button so that its indicator lights to turn the currently selected reverb effect on (since the REVERB indicator is auto- matically on when the power is initially turned on, you may have to turn it off and then on again). The reverb effect is alternately turned on and off every time the [REVERB] button is pressed.

Reverb is turned on and the HALL 1 effect is automatically selected when the POWER switch is turned on. However, the last setting can be re- called when the power is turned off and on via the Backup function page 107.

Reverb Type List HALL1

Concert hall reverb. HALL2 ROOM1 ROOM2 Small room reverb. ROOM3 STAGE1

Reverb for solo instruments. STAGE2 PLATE Simulated steel plate reverb. WHITE ROOM Distinctive short reverb with initial delay. TUNNEL Simulation of long tunnel-like space. CANYON Long, cavernous reverb.

BASEMENT Small, highly reflective room reverb.

(CVP-79A only)

REVERB

Different reverb types and depth settings can be selected via the pop- up display that appears when the [REVERB] button is turned on. Use the TYPE LCD buttons to select the desired reverb type, or use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons when the TYPE parameter is highlighted.

OFF may appear if the reverb type off message is received via MIDI.

23

Total Depth Control

The overall depth of the selected reverb type can be increased or de- creased by using the TOTAL DEPTH LCD buttons, or the data dial or [+]/ [] buttons when the TOTAL DEPTH parameter is highlighted. The total depth range is from 0 (no reverb) through 100 (maximum reverb). The default TOTAL DEPTH value of 50 can be instantly recalled by pressing both the TOTAL DEPTH LCD buttons or [+] and [] buttons simultaneously.

Individual Part Depth Control

The depth of the reverb effect applied to the accompaniment rhythm, bass, chord, and keyboard parts can be individually adjusted via the pa- rameters provided in page 2 of the reverb display. These values are rela- tive to the total depth value. Use the PAGE buttons to select page 2, press the LCD button corresponding to the part for which you want to adjust the reverb depth, then use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to adjust the reverb depth as required. The LCD buttons can be held to increase the depth for the corresponding part only. The individual part reverb depth range is from 0 (no reverb) to 100 (maximum reverb). The default setting of 50 can be instantly recalled for any part by simulta- neously pressing the [+] and [] buttons while the depth parameter for the desired part is selected.

The TOTAL DEPTH setting applies to all parts.

The actual reverb depth for each part is determined by the product of the TOTAL DEPTH and individual part depth settings. For example, if one is 0, no reverb will be produced even if the other is 100.

Both total and individual part depth can be adjusted in five steps.

Digital Reverb

+

24

Voice Effects

Each CVP-79A/69/69A/59S voice has individual effect type and depth settings that can be programmed as required. A range of 20 (17 in the case of the CVP-69/69A/59S) effects provides extensive musical versatility.

Selecting a Voice Effect

Press the [EFFECT] button so that its indicator lights to turn the cur- rently selected voice effect on (press again so that its indicator goes out to turn the effect off).

Different effect types and depth settings can be selected via the pop- up display that appears when the [EFFECT] button is turned on. Use the TYPE LCD buttons to select the desired effect type, or use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons when the TYPE parameter is highlighted.

The default effect type can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the TYPE LCD buttons or [+]/[] buttons.

ORGAN STRINGS/

CHOIR BRASS SAX/

FLUTE BASS DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANO

VOICE

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

EFFECT

DELAY L,C,R Three independent delays, for the left, right and center stereo positions.

DELAY L,R Initial delay for each stereo channel, and two separate feedback delays.

ECHO Stereo delay. CROSS DELAY Complex effect that sends the de-

layed repeats bouncing between the left and right channels.

TREMOLO Rich Tremolo effect with both volume and pitch modulation.

ROTARY FAST Rotary speaker simulation. ROTARY SLOW Rotary speaker simulation.

Effect Type List

CHORUS1 Conventional chorus program with

CHORUS2 rich, warm chorusing. CHORUS3 CELESTE Three-phase LFO for richer, more

pronounced chorusing. DETUNE Slight pitch change for each channel.

FLANGER Pronounced three-phase modulation with slight metallic sound.

SYMPHONIC Exceptionally rich & deep chorusing. AUTO PAN Several panning effects that auto-

matically shift the sound position (left, right).

(CVP-79A only)

OTHERS or OFF may appear if another effect type or off is set to a voice or received via MIDI.

25

Voice Effects

One-touch Preset Recall

Press the PRESET LCD button to instantly recall the preset effect type and DEPTH1(R) settings for the current voice. The DEPTH2(L) setting is not affected.

Each voice has its own individual default effect on/off, type, and depth settings. Your own settings can be backed up via the Backup function described on page 107.

The DEPTH2(L) setting affects all voices. Its default value is 50, but your own setting can be backed up via the Backup function described on page 107.

COMPRESSOR Affects the dynamics of the sound by smoothing out the high-volume peaks and soft-volume dips.

BOOST HL Equalizer to boost high and low frequencies.

PHASER Pronounced, metallic modulation with periodic phase change.

AUTO WAH Repeating filter sweep wah effect. TOUCH WAH Wah effect that varies filter sweep

according to touch.(CVP-79A only)

(CVP-79A only)

Effect Depth Control

When a single voice is selected only one depth parameter will appear. When the DUAL or SPLIT mode is engaged, separate depth parameters will appear for the main and 2nd (dual) or right- and left-hand (split) voices. The depth of the selected effect can be increased or decreased by using the DEPTH1(R) and/or DEPTH2(L) LCD buttons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons when the DEPTH1(R) or DEPTH2(L) parameter is highlighted. The DEPTH1(R) and DEPTH2(L) buttons can be held to only increase the depth of the corresponding voice. The depth range is from 0 (no effect) to 100 (maximum effect depth). The default DEPTH1(R) or DEPTH2(L) setting can be instantly recalled for either depth parameter by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [] buttons while the desired depth parameter is selected DEPTH2(L) is reset to 50.

+

The main or right-hand voice effect type is commonly used for the 2nd or left-hand voice.

The depth can be adjusted in five step intervals.

The DEPTH1(R) and/or DEPTH2(L) value for some effect types may be fixed to 100 and/or 0 respectively and cannot be changed.

26

The Pedals

The CVP-79A/69/69A has three pedals and the CVP-59S has two pedals which offer a range of advanced expressive capabilities.

Right Pedal (Damper Pedal)

The damper pedal functions in the same way as a damper pedal on an acoustic piano. When the damper pedal is pressed notes played have a long sustain. Releasing the pedal immediately stops (damps) any sus- tained notes.

The CVP-79A damper pedal can be set for continuous (default) or on/off type damping control via the DAMPER MODE function (page 94).

CVP-69/69ACVP-79A CVP-59S

Damper Pedal Damper Pedal Damper Pedal

Center Pedal (Sostenuto Pedal CVP-79A/69/69A only)

If you play a note or chord on the keyboard and press the sostenuto pedal while the note(s) are held, those notes will be sustained as long as the pedal is held (as if the damper pedal had been pressed) but all subse- quently played notes will not be sustained. This makes it possible to sus- tain a chord, for example, while other notes are played staccato.

CVP-79A CVP-69/69A

Sostenuto Pedal Sostenuto Pedal

27

Left Pedal (Multi-function)

The left pedal has a number of functions which can be selected via the LEFT PEDAL function described on page 93. The damper and sostenuto pedal

functions do not affect DRUMS/PERC. voices where inappropriate.

The Pedals

CVP-69/69ACVP-79A CVP-59S

Left PedalLeft PedalLeft Pedal

Soft Pressing the soft pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. The SOFT function is automatically selected when the POWER switch is initially turned on.

Start/Stop The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [START/STOP] button. For details on the START/STOP function, refer to the Accompaniment section, pages 30 and 32.

Harmony On/Off Allows the Harmony function (page 41) to be turned on or off as required while playing so that harmony can be applied only to specific notes or phrases.

Registration + Steps through the registration memory locations so a completely different set of panel settings can be recalled each time the pedal is pressed. See page 60 for details on the registration memory.

Intro A/Fill to A The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [INTRO A/FILL TO A] button. See pages 30 and 32 for details.

Intro B/Fill to B The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [INTRO B/FILL TO B] button. See pages 30 and 32 for details.

Ending/rit. The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [ENDING] button. See page 32 for details.

Break Pressing the left pedal produces a break in the accompa- niment for as long as the pedal is held. For details on the BREAK function, refer to the Accompaniment section, page 32.

Sostenuto The left pedal functions in the same way as the CVP- 79A/69/69A sostenuto pedal (see above).(CVP-59S only)

CVP-79A

28

Accompaniment

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S has 100 musical styles that can be used as a basis for rhythm accompaniment, or fully orchestrated rhythm, bass, and chord accompaniment (see Auto Bass Chord on page 34).

Accompaniment playback data is not usually transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector. But it can be transmit-enabled via the MIDI 3 Send function described on page 97.

Style Selection

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59Ss 100 preset accompaniment styles are organized in 11 groups (see page 120 for a complete style list). Use the STYLE selectors to select the group from which you want to select a style. The corresponding style display will appear.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the page containing the style you want if more than one page is available, then press the LCD button corre- sponding to the desired style. You can also use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select any of the styles within the selected group.

The display will automatically revert to the main play mode display after a few seconds if the [DISPLAY HOLD] button is not engaged (page 9).

The last style selected within each group will automatically be recalled whenever a STYLE button is pressed while the power remains on. The last selected style in each group can also be backed up even after the power is turned off via the Backup function on page 107.

The Pop Ballad 1 style is automatically selected when the power is turned on. However, the last-selected style can be recalled when the power is turned off and on via the Backup function on page 107.

There is also a [DISK/CUSTOM] but- ton that can be used to select styles loaded from optional Style File floppy disks or disks containing custom styles you have created yourself. See the Style File Load and Custom Style sections on pages 55 and 45 for de- tails.

Use the [ABC/SONG VOLUME] control to adjust the volume of the accompani- ment sound.

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP CUSTOM

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

29

Accompaniment

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

Styles within the current group can still be selected via the STYLE and LCD buttons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the STYLE section of the display has been highlighted, from the main play mode display.

Tempo Control

Whenever you select a different style, the preset tempo for that style is also selected, and the tempo is displayed on the display in number of beats per minute (unless the accompaniment is playing, in which case the same tempo is maintained).

The preset tempo for the selected style can be recalled at any time by pressing both the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons simultaneously.

You can change the tempo to any value between 32 and 280 beats per minute, however, by using the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons. This can be done either before the accompaniment is started or while it is playing. Press either button briefly to decrement or increment the tempo value by one, or hold the button for continuous decrementing or incrementing.

TEMPO +

PRESET

Tempo

30

Accompaniment

Starting the Accompaniment

There are several ways to start the accompaniment:

Straight Start .........................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button. Each of the styles also has two main variations that can be selected by

pressing the [MAIN A] button or [MAIN B] button before pressing the [START/STOP] button. Normally the [MAIN A] button LED will be lit (or you can select it if the other variation is selected), indicating that the MAIN A pattern is selected. You can also switch between the [MAIN A] and [MAIN B] variations during playback the new variation begins from the top of the next measure if the button is pressed on or after the 2nd beat of a measure.

The [START/STOP] button indicator will be lit during accompani- ment playback and off when the accompaniment is stopped.

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

Start With an Introduction.......................................................................

Press the [INTRO A/FILL TO A] or [INTRO B/FILL TO B] but- ton.

In the first case the [INTRO A/FILL TO A] indicator will light con- tinuously and the [MAIN A] indicator will flash, indicating that the MAIN A variation will play after an appropriate introduction. In the lat- ter case the [INTRO B/FILL TO B] indicator will light continuously and the [MAIN B] indicator will flash, indicating that the MAIN B vari- ation will play after an appropriate introduction. Press the [START/ STOP] button to actually start playback. The selected introduction can be disengaged before starting playback by pressing the [MAIN A], [MAIN B], or [ENDING] button.

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

31

Accompaniment

Synchronized Start .........................................................................................

Any of the start types described above can be synchronized to the first note or chord played on the keyboard by first pressing the [SYNCHRO] button so that its indicator lights. When the keyboard is split or Auto Bass Chord Single Finger or Fingered mode is used, the first note played on the left-hand section of the keyboard will start the accompaniment (i.e. keys to the left of and including the split-point key normally F#2). Use the [MAIN A], [MAIN B] and/or [INTRO A/FILL TO A] or [INTRO B/FILL TO B] buttons to select the type of start you want.

TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

START/STOP

The first (red) dot of the BEAT display will flash at the current tempo when a synchronized start mode has been selected. The synchronized start mode can be canceled by pressing the [SYNCHRO] button a sec- ond time so that its indicator goes out. The synchronized start mode is automatically canceled once playback has started.

Tap start ......................................................................................................................

This function lets you set the tempo and start the rhythm in one op- eration. Simply tap the [TAP] button at the required tempo 3 times for a 3/4 style, 4 times for 2/4, 4/4, and 6-beat styles, and 5 times for 5-beat styles. The rhythm will start from the beginning of the next measure at the specified tempo.

The [TAP] button can also be used to change the tempo during rhythm play- back (tap twice). In this case the tap click will not sound.

If you tap the [TAP] button less than the required number of times (i.e. 3, 4, or 5), the tap tempo function will be canceled after a few seconds.

TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

START/STOP

The Beat Display ...............................................................................................

The four LED dots of the BEAT display provide a visual indication of the selected tempo during accompaniment playback. The leftmost (red) dot flashes on the first beat of each measure, the second dot flashes on the second beat, and so on (all dots except the leftmost dot are green). The current measure number appears on the LCD during playback.

BEAT

Measure number

If the [SYNCHRO] button is pressed during playback, playback is stopped and the synchronized start mode is automatically engaged.

32

Accompaniment

The accompaniment can be stopped at any time by pressing the [START/STOP] button. Press the [ENDING] button if you want to go to the ending pattern and then stop. Press [ENDING] a second time dur- ing ending playback to produce a ritardando (gradually slowing) ending. Different ending patterns are provided for the MAIN A and MAIN B

Playback will start with the ending pattern if you press the [ENDING] button before starting playback. The ending can be disengaged before starting playback by pressing any other variation button.

Stopping the Accompaniment

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S provides four types of automatic fill-ins.

Fill-ins

Fill To A: Press the [INTRO A/FILL TO A] button during play- back to produce a fill-in and go to the MAIN A rhythm pattern. Different fill-in patterns are produced when go- ing from A to A or B to A.

Fill To B: Press the [INTRO B/FILL TO B] button during play- back to produce a fill-in and go to the MAIN B pattern. Different fill-in patterns are produced when going from A to B or B to B.

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON

AUTO BASS CHORD

If you hold one of the FILL buttons, the fill-in will repeat until the end of the measure in which button is released. If you press a fill-in but- ton during the fill-in, the fill-in will stop and playback of the previous variation will resume.

When the left-pedal function is set to Break as described on pages 27 and 93, the left pedal can be used to create a break in the accompani- ment while playing. Press the left pedal to mute the accompaniment sound. Accompaniment sound will resume from the top of the next measure when the pedal is released. The break can be canceled before the beginning of the next measure by pressing the pedal a second time.

Left-pedal Break

CVP-79A

33

Accompaniment

During playback the indicator of the currently-playing variation will be lit while that of the next variation to play flashes. (The only exception is: during playback of the ending, the flashing [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] button indicator indicates which ending variation is currently playing.)

If the left pedal is switched to START/ STOP operation (pages 27 and 93), it performs the same function as the panel [START/STOP] buttons (press to START, press again to STOP). The left pedal can also be assigned for INTRO A/FILL TO A, INTRO B/FILL TO B, and ENDING operation pages 30 and 32.

variations (the [MAIN A] or [MAIN B] button indictor will flash during the ending). The ending will begin from the top of the next measure if the [ENDING] button is pressed on or after the 2nd beat of a measure.

TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

START/STOP

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON

AUTO BASS CHORD

Metronome

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S also offers a metronome function that is ideal for practice.

To start the metronome, simply press the [METRONOME] button so that its indicator lights. The metronome will play at the currently selected tempo whether a style is playing or not. The metronome volume can be adjusted via the [ABC/SONG VOLUME] control.

METRONOME

The pop-up screen that appears when the [METRONOME] button is pressed also provides access to a range of other metronome settings. When NORMAL is selected the metronome click sounds continuously at the current tempo with no accented beats. The 4/4, 3/4, 2/4, and 5/4 settings produce a bell accent on the first beat of each measure.

If a style is started by pressing the [START/STOP] button while the metro- nome is playing, the metronome will continue to sound along with the style.

The metronome bell accent will not sound during accompaniment play- back.

Press the [METRONOME] button again to stop the metronome sound (the METRONOME indicator will go out). The metronome will also stop automatically if the [START/STOP] button is pressed to stop a style in progress.

34

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S includes a sophisticated auto-accompa- niment system (Auto Bass Chord ABC) that can provide auto- mated rhythm, bass and chord backing in a number of ways.

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP CUSTOM

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

HARMONY

ONE TOUCH SETTING

Single-Finger, Fingered Chord, and Full Keyboard Accompaniment

Single Finger accompaniment makes it simple to produce accompaniment using major, seventh, minor and minor-seventh chords by pressing a minimum number of keys in the ABC section of the keyboard. The automatic accompaniment consists of rhythm, bass and chords.

Fingered Chord accompaniment is ideal if you already know how to play chords on a keyboard, since it allows you to supply your own chords for the auto accompaniment feature.

When the Full Keyboard mode is selected the Clavinova will automatically create appro- priate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard.

ZSelect a Style .........................................................................................................

Select an accompaniment style using the style selectors and STYLE pop-up screen (see Style Selection on page 28).

XSet the Tempo .......................................................................................................

Use the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons to set the desired accompani- ment tempo if necessary (see Tempo Control on page 29 for more de- tails).

TEMPO +

PRESET

35

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

CTurn ABC On ..........................................................................................................

Press the [ABC ON] button so that its indicator lights and the ABC MODE pop-up screen appears. The ABC mode is alternately turned on and off each time the [ABC ON] button is pressed.

Detected chord name

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON

AUTO BASS CHORD

VSelect an ABC Mode......................................................................................

Before the ABC MODE pop-up screen disappears use the LCD but- tons to select the SINGLE FINGER, FINGERED CHORD, or FULL KEYBOARD ABC mode. The default mode is SINGLE FINGER, but the mode you select is backed up even after the [POWER] switch is turned off. Backup can be turned off via the Backup function page 107.

BStart & Play..............................................................................................................

Start playback by pressing the [START/STOP] button or by using the [SYNCHRO] start mode.

Single-finger Accompaniment Pressing any key on the ABC section of the keyboard (up to the split point normally the F#2 key) will cause the automatic chord and bass accompaniment to begin. If you press a C key, for example, a C-major accompaniment will be played. Press another key in the ABC section of the keyboard to select a new chord. The key you press will always determine the root of the chord played (i.e. C for a C chord). The name of the detected chord will appear on the display.

36

Single-finger minor, seventh, and minor-seventh chords can be played as follows:

For a minor chord, press the root key and a black key to its left.

For a seventh chord, press the root key and a white key to its left.

For a minor-seventh chord, press the root key and both a white and black key to its left.

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

Fingered Accompaniment As soon as you play any chord on the lower keyboard (up to the split point normally the F#2 key), the Clavinova will automatically be- gin to play the chord along with the rhythm and an appropriate bass line. The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. * will appear if the chord is not recognizable by the CVP-79A/69/69A/ 59S.

The Clavinova will accept the following chord types in the Fingered Accompaniment mode:

The automatic accompaniment will sometimes not change when related chords are played in sequence (e.g. some minor chords followed by the minor seventh).

Cm

C7

Cm7

Major Sixth [6] Major seventh [M7] Major seventh flatted fifth [M7(b5)] Major seventh sharp eleventh [M7(#11)] Added ninth [add9] Major seventh ninth [M7(9)] Six ninth [6(9)] Flatted fifth [(b5)] Augmented [aug] Seventh augmented [7(#5)] Major seventh augmented [M7(#5)] Minor [m] Minor sixth [m6] Minor seventh [m7] Minor seventh flatted fifth [m7(b5)] Minor added ninth [madd9]

Minor seventh ninth [m7(9)] Minor seventh eleventh [m7(11)] Minor major seventh flatted fifth [mM7(b5)] Minor major seventh [mM7] Minor major seventh ninth [mM7(9)] Minor flatted fifth [m(b5)] Diminished seventh [dim7] Seventh [7] Seventh suspended fourth [7sus4] Seventh ninth [7(9)] Seventh sharp eleventh [7(#11)] Seventh added thirteenth [7(13)] Seventh flatted fifth [7(b5)] Seventh flatted ninth [7(b9)] Seventh added flatted thirteenth [7(b13)] Seventh sharp ninth [7(#9)] Suspended fourth [sus4]

* A Fingering Chart is provided on page 123.

On-bass chords are also recognized. Two-note fingerings will pro- duce a chord based on the previous chord. No chord (i.e. rhythm only accompaniment) can be produced by pressing any three consecutive keys (ex. C,C#,D) simultaneously. - - - will appear instead of a chord name.

37

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

Full-keyboard ABC When this advanced auto-accompaniment mode is engaged the Clavinova will automatically create appropriate accompaniment while you play just about anything, anywhere on the keyboard: chords, a bass line, arpeggiated chords, a melody line. The name of the detected chord will appear on the display. You dont have to worry about speci- fying the accompaniment chords. Although Full-keyboard ABC is designed to work with many songs, some arrangements may not be suitable for use with this feature. Try playing a few simple songs in the Full-keyboard ABC mode to get a feel for its capabilities.

Chord detection occurs at approxi- mately 8th-note intervals. Extremely short chords less than an 8th note in length may therefore not be detected.

The DUAL or SPLIT mode can be used with ABC.

NStop the Accompaniment ........................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] or [ENDING] button to stop the accompa- niment.

The [INTRO A/FILL TO A], [INTRO B/ FILL TO B], [MAIN A], [MAIN B], and [ENDING] buttons can be used in the ABC mode to create pattern variations (refer to the Accompaniment section on pages 30 and 32 for details).

TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

START/STOP

Press the [ABC ON] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to exit from the ABC mode.

Overall Accompaniment Volume Control

Use the ABC/SONG VOLUME control to adjust the volume of the accompaniment sound in relation to the keyboard sound. No accompani- ment sound will be produced if the MASTER VOLUME control is set to its MIN position.

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON

AUTO BASS CHORD

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

38

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

Individual Part Volume Control

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S has five accompaniment parts RHYTHM, BASS, CHORD, PAD, and PHRASE. that function as follows:

RHYTHM This is the main rhythm part. The RHYTHM part usually plays one of the drum kits.

BASS The BASS part always plays a bass line, but the voice will change to fit the selected style acoustic bass, synth bass, tuba, etc.

CHORD This part provides the rhythmic chordal accompaniment required by each style. Youll find guitar, piano, and other chordal instru- ments here.

PAD This part plays long chords where necessary, using sustained instruments such as strings, organ, choir.

PHRASE This is where the musical embellishments reside. The PHRASE part is used for punchy brass stabs, arpeggiated chords, and other extras that make the accompaniment more interesting.

The volume of the RHYTHM, BASS, CHORD, PAD, and PHRASE ac- companiment parts can be individually adjusted via the volume parameters accessed by the [MIXER] button. Select the part you want to control by first pressing the appropriate LCD button, then use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to set the volume as required. The normal volume level for any part (90) can be instantly recalled by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [] buttons while the desired part is selected. Several parts can be selected at once by pressing their buttons at the same time. The volume of all selected parts can then be adjusted simultaneously. The mixer parameters will disappear when the [MIXER] button is pressed a second time (or the [EXIT] button is pressed).

Some styles may not use all five parts.

The volume level can be adjusted in two steps intervals.

The second page of the MIXER display (accessed via the PAGE buttons) includes individual volume parameters for the keyboard (manually played sound) and harmony function sound see page 41 for details on the Har- mony function. Theres also a PRESET LCD button in this page which in- stantly resets all MIXER volume parameters to their default values (100 for KBD part, and 90 for all other parts).

FUNCTION MIXER

Part volume relation: ABC/SONG volume is relative to

the MASTER VOLUME. Each RHYTHM, BASS, CHORD,

PAD or PHRASE part volume is relative to ABC/SONG volume.

KBD part volume is relative to MASTER volume.

HARMONY part volume is relative to KBD part volume.

39

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

Small ABC

A simple form of orchestration control is provided by the [SMALL ABC] button. When this button is pressed so that its indicator lights some of the accompaniment parts are turned off to create a simpler, smaller accompaniment sound.

ABC will not sound when the [ABC ON] button is turned off, even if the [SMALL ABC] button is turned on.

Press the [SMALL ABC] button a second time so that its indicator goes out to turn the SMALL ABC function off.

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON

AUTO BASS CHORD

Changing the ABC Split Point

The ABC split point can be set at any key by pressing the desired key while holding the [ABC ON] button. The split point can also be set by using the SPLIT POINT LCD button in the ABC MODE pop-up dis- play, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons. The default split point F#2 can be recalled by simultaneously pressing the [+] and [] buttons.

+

The split point is indicated by the key- board guide lamp above the split point key.

ENDING SMALL

ABC ABC ON

40

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

Chord Assist

The Chord Assist function is essentially an electronic chord book that will show you appropriate fingerings for chords you enter via the display. The fingerings are indicated via the keyboard guide lamps, and correspond to those recognized in the ABC Fingered mode. You can also play chords on the keyboard in the same way as in the ABC Fingered mode.

ZSelect the Chord Assist Function...................................................

Press the CHORD ASSIST LCD button in the ABC MODE pop-up display.

XStart the Accompaniment .......................................................................

Start the accompaniment by using any of the methods described on pages 30 and 31.

CEnter the Chord Root ...................................................................................

Press the ROOT LCD button to select the desired chord root, or use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the ROOT parameter is selected.

VEnter the Chord Type ....................................................................................

Use the TYPE and LCD buttons to select the chord type. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the TYPE parameter is selected.

41

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

BEnter the Chord ..................................................................................................

The fingering for the chord selected via the LCD buttons will appear on the keyboard guide lamps. At this point you can either play the indi- cated chord on the keyboard or press the ENTER LCD button to actually enter the specified chord i.e. the specified chord accompaniment will sound.

The chord name entered via the LCD will appear in the TYPE and ROOT parameter locations, while the actually recognized chord name will appear next to the keyboard symbol above the parameters.

A flashing keyboard guide lamp indi- cates a note which may be omitted.

NRotate the Fingering as Necessary ..............................................

Press the ROTATE LCD button to shift the fingering down the key- board. Each time the ROTATE button is pressed the next viable fingering (inversion) appears on the guide lamps. The inversion number appears in the ROTATE section of the display.

MStop the Accompaniment ........................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] or [ENDING] button to stop the accompa- niment.

<Exit When Done ..................................................................................................

Press the panel [ABC ON] button, so that its indicator goes out, to exit from the Chord Assist function and ABC mode when done.

Harmony

ZTurn Harmony On .............................................................................................

Press the [HARMONY] button so that its indicator lights to turn the HARMONY feature on.

The Harmony feature cannot be turned on when the Full Keyboard ABC mode is selected.

This feature automatically adds appropriate harmony notes or delayed decorative notes (up to three notes) to a melody or chords you play on the keyboard. The harmony notes are produced to match chords played via the ABC auto-accompaniment system.

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

The following chord types can be specified via the Chord Assist display: Maj, 7, m, m7, m7(b5), 6, m6, M7, sus4, aug, m(b5), 7sus4, 7(#5), dim7, (b5), 7(b5), mM7. All fingered-mode chords (page 36) can be entered via the keyboard.

The split point is not shown on the guide lamps when the Chord Assist function is engaged.

If the split point is set below F#2 it will automatically be set at F#2.

42

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

XSelect a Harmony Type ...............................................................................

While the HARMONY pop-up display is showing, use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select the desired harmony type. 16 harmony types are available.

With some harmony types the voice used for the harmony will be different from the currently selected voice.

+

The Harmony feature can be used while ABC is off, but only octaves will be produced.

CSet Up ABC As Required..........................................................................

Select an accompaniment style, tempo, and ABC mode (except Full Keyboard).

VStart ABC Playback ........................................................................................

Start accompaniment playback using any of the methods described on pages 30 and 31.

BPlay ..................................................................................................................................

Play the required chords (single-finger or fingered chord) on the ABC section of the keyboard while playing a melody line or chords on the right-hand section of the keyboard. When chords are played on the right- hand section of the keyboard, the harmony will be applied to the last note played.

Duet

Trio

4 Part

4 Part Jazz

Country

Octave

Tremolo

Tremolo Duet

Tremolo Oct

Strumming

Trio Delay

Vibes & J.Gtr

Add Trp & Sax

Backing Vocal

Add Strings

Forest

Harmony Type List

43

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

NStop the Accompaniment ........................................................................

Press [START/STOP] or [ENDING] button to stop the accompani- ment.

MTurn Harmony Off .............................................................................................

Press the [HARMONY] button again, so that its indicator goes out, to turn the function off.

Harmony can be turned on and off while playing.

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

The Left Pedal & Harmony ......................................................................

If the Left Pedal Function is set to HARMONY ON/OFF (pages 27 and 93), harmonization of notes played on the right-hand section of the keyboard only occurs while the left pedal is pressed. This allows you to combine normal ABC type performance with harmony as required.

CVP-79A

The Left Pedal HARMONY ON/OFF function is not effective when the HAR- MONY feature is off (i.e. the [HAR- MONY] buttons indicator is not lit).

44

Auto Bass Chord (ABC)

One Touch Setting

The CVP-79A internal styles each have 4 different preset panel setups that can be recalled via the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button to create different musical textures. The CVP-69/69A styles have 3, and the CVP-59S styles have 1. The ONE TOUCH SETTING setups include settings for all of the follow- ing parameters:

One Touch Setting Parameter List

Accompaniment Parameters

ZEngage the One Touch Setting Feature ...................................

The ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be used either while an accompaniment is playing or prior to starting an accompaniment by sim- ply pressing the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button. The corresponding panel setup is recalled immediately. On the CVP-79A and CVP-69/69A other ONE TOUCH SETTING setups can also be recalled in the ONE TOUCH SETTING pop-up display by using the SELECT and LCD buttons.

To return to the settings that were active prior to engaging the One Touch Setting feature, re-select the style after selecting a different style (ABC will remain on however).

The One Touch Setting feature cannot be used when a [DISK/CUSTOM] style is selected.

ABC is automatically turned ON when the One Touch Setting feature is en- gaged.

The synchronized start mode is auto- matically turned ON if the One Touch Setting feature is engaged before starting the accompaniment.

If the STYLE SETTING parameter in the BACKUP function (page 107) is set to on, the One Touch Setting setup selection for each style will be retained in memory even when the power is turned off. This way the desired setup can be recalled immediately when the [ONE TOUCH SETTING] button is pressed. (CVP-79A/69/69A)

Harmony will not be turned on if the ABC Full Keyboard mode is selected, even if the selected One Touch Setting setup includes Harmony ON.

ABC On Small ABC On/Off Harmony On/Off Harmony Type ABC/Song Volume Main A/B Tempo

Dual Detune Depth Reverb On/Off Reverb Type Reverb Depth (Total,

Rhythm, Bass, Chord, Keyboard)

Effect On/Off Effect Type

Effect Depth (Main Voice, Dual Voice, Split Voice)

Right/1 Octave Shift Left Octave Shift 2nd Octave Shift Right/1 Pan Left Pan 2nd Pan

Rhythm Volume Bass Volume Chord Volume Pad Volume Phrase Volume Harmony Volume

Voice Parameters

Voice Keyboard Volume Dual Mode Split Mode Dual Voice Split Voice Dual Balance Split Balance

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

CVP-79A

XAdjust The Settings If Necessary ...................................................

Any of the parameters set by the ONE TOUCH SETTING feature can be adjusted to create the desired sound after a ONE TOUCH SETTING setup has been selected.

45

Custom Style

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S Custom Style feature allows you to create original accompaniment styles that can be later recalled and played at any time, just like the presets. Up to 8 custom styles can be maintained in internal memory at the same time, and any number can be saved to disk for later reloading and use. The basic custom style recording procedure is outlined below.

Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned off, so be sure to save your custom styles to disk before turning the power off.

One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on. (Memory is common to the Custom Styles and the loaded styles from the optional Style File disks page 55.)

ZEngage the Custom Style Feature .................................................

Press the [DISK/CUSTOM] style selector so that its indicator lights, then press the CUSTOM STYLE LCD button. The Please select a source STYLE. message will appear on the display for a few seconds before going to the CUSTOM STYLE page 1 display and the current [DISK/ CUSTOM] style will begin playing.

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

XSelect a Source Style ...................................................................................

Select a preset style that is close to the style you want to create. Preset style selection is carried out in the normal way (page 28).

If you want to select a [DISK/CUSTOM] style, press the [DISK/ CUSTOM] style selector once again and use the STYLE and but- tons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select a [DISK/CUSTOM] style.

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

DISK

CUSTOM

46

CSelect the Section You Want to Record ...................................

In the CUSTOM STYLE page 1 display, press the first LCD button as many times as necessary to select the section you want to program first: MAIN A, MAIN B, INTRO, FILL IN, or ENDING. The MAIN A sec- tion is initially selected.

Custom Style

In the CUSTOM STYLE, MAIN A, MAIN B, INTRO, FILL IN or ENDING are referred to as section, and RHYTHM 1/2, BASS, CHORD 1/2, PAD or PHRASE 1/2 are referred to as part.

Only one pattern can be created for each INTRO, FILL IN and ENDING section.

Whether the A or B variations of the INTRO, FILL IN and ENDING sections are used as the source pattern de- pends on whether the MAIN A or MAIN B section was selected when the Cus- tom Style function was engaged. (As for FILL IN, FILL IN from A to A, or FILL IN from B to B is used.)

VChange the Time Signature & Number Of Measures, If Required ................................................................................................................

If you want to create a style in a different time signature than the cur- rent style, or change the number of measures in the selected section, Press the PAGE [>] button to go to CUSTOM STYLE page 2.

Current recording section and part

Use the BEAT LCD button to select a different time signature, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the BEAT parameter has been selected. As soon as you choose to change the beat value, the Clear STYLE ? prompt will appear, since you will have to completely clear all sections and parts of the style and start recording from scratch if you change the time signature. Press OK to clear the style, or CANCEL to abort. Once the style has been cleared you can select a new time signature as re- quired: 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, or 5/4.

Beat of the selected styleCurrent measure number of the selected section

Total measure number of the selected section

47

Custom Style

Use the MEAS. LCD button to select a different number of measures for the selected section, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the MEAS. parameter has been selected. As soon as you choose to change the number of measures in the section, the Clear SECTION ? prompt will appear, since you will have to clear all parts of the currently selected section and start recording from scratch if you change the number of measures. Press OK to clear the section, or CANCEL to abort. Once the section has been cleared you can select a new number of meas- ures as required: 1 through 8. The FILL IN section has only 1 measure and the number of measures cannot be changed although the FILL IN section can be cleared using this operation.

Once the BEAT and/or MEAS. parameters have been set as required, press the PAGE [<] button to go back to the first custom style page.

BSelect the Part & Voice You Want to Record ......................

Use the PART LCD button, the data dial, or [+]/[] buttons to select the part you want to record:

R1 Rhythm 1

R2 Rhythm 2

Bs Bass

C1 Chord 1

C2 Chord 2

Pd Pad

P1 Phrase 1

P2 Phrase 2

The R1 part is initially selected and set to the record mode. Any part you select can be set to the record mode by using the rightmost LCD button to select REC after selecting the part ( the part number will appear white in a black box). Since parts other than R1 and R2 must be cleared before they can be recorded (if the source style is a preset style or a style loaded from the optional Style File disk) the Clear Part ? confirmation will appear if you select a part that contains data: press OK to clear the part and continue, or CANCEL to abort. Only one part can be set to the record mode. All other parts will be set to PLAY (part number surrounded by box) or turned OFF (part number only no box). Parts that contain no data are indicated by a dot in place of the part number.

48

Custom Style

At this point you can also select the voice you want to record with (the preset voice for that part will initially be selected). Only [DRUMS/ PERC.] voices can be used for the R1 part and only Drum Kit voices can be used for the R2 part, while any other voices can be selected for the remaining parts.

NRecord the Selected part..........................................................................

You can now add new parts to the selected part by playing the key- board at the appropriate timing (play in C Major seventh since the Cus- tom Style is recorded as a C Major seventh pattern). If you want to create a totally new part from scratch, press the CLEAR LCD button to clear the selected part before beginning to record. If both the R1 and R2 parts are cleared the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide (the met- ronome sound is not recorded). When a drum kit voice is used, a single drum instrument sound can be cleared from the R1 or R2 part by press- ing the key corresponding to the instrument to be cleared while holding the keyboard CANCEL (C1) key. The metronome timing guide can also be cleared in this way.

Playback can be started and stopped via the [START/STOP] button as re- quired while in the Custom Style mode data cannot be recorded while playback is stopped.

MQuantize the Recorded Part, if Necessary ............................

You can tighten up the timing of a recorded part by aligning all notes to specified beats via the PART QUANTIZE function in CUSTOM STYLE page 2 (press the PAGE [>] button). Press the LCD button be- low the note symbol to select quantize size i.e. the beats to which the notes in the current part will be aligned:

Another useful recording aid is the SOLO LCD button: when this button is pressed and highlighted, only the selected part will sound. Press the SOLO button again to turn the solo function off and hear the entire style.

3

3

3

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

The timing guide will stop as soon as the Custom Style is stored.

The sound of all parts is automatically stopped at the end of the style i.e. at the point between repeats when recording. It is therefore not advisable to record over this point.

49

Custom Style

During Custom Style recording, no MIXER display is available.

Once the required quantize size has been selected press the START LCD button to actually quantize the current part. Playback will stop for an instant while the data is being quantized, then the START LCD button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data if the results are not as you expected. You will not be able to UNDO once another button has been pressed.

<Repeat Until the Custom Style is Complete ........................

Repeat steps 3 through 7 until all parts or all sections have been re- corded as required.

Quantization can only be applied to the current recording part. Quantization cannot be executed if no part is set to the record mode.

>Name the Custom Style .............................................................................

When your custom style is complete, use the PAGE buttons to select CUSTOM STYLE page 3, and press the STYLE NAME LCD button to go to the style naming page.

The current style name appears in the upper right corner of the dis- play. Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the char- acter you want to change (style names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [+]/[] buttons to select the charac- ter you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the c.set LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor posi- tion. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The c.del LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete a character.

When the name is complete press the OK LCD button to register the name for the current custom style, or CANCEL to abort.

50

Custom Style

?Store the Custom Style ..............................................................................

Press the STORE LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE page 3 to store the current custom style in the internal memory. The Store XXXXXXXX? confirmation prompt and MEMORY No. parameter will appear (XXXXXXXX is the style name). Use the MEMORY No. and LCD buttons to select the memory number 1 through 8 to which you want to store the custom style, then press OK to store or CANCEL to abort.

[Exit When Done ..................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style mode and re- turn to the normal play mode.

Custom style data is not retained in memory when the power is turned off, so be sure to save your custom style before turning the power off see Save to disk on page 52.EXIT

The tempo setting at the time the Custom Style is stored becomes the preset tempo for that style.

If the selected memory number already contains a style, the style name will appear next to the memory number. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is stored.

Other Custom Style Functions

In addition to the various functions described in the basic custom style recording procedure, above, the CUSTOM STYLE display pages include several other functions that you may find useful when creating custom styles.

Recall Section ......................................................................................................

This function makes it possible to recall the last-stored version of the currently selected section (all parts of the section are recalled). Simply press the RECALL SECTION LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE page 2. If the recall operation cant be carried out (i.e. The time signature has been changed), the Cant recall! alert display will appear. If this happens press OK to return to the previous display.

51

Custom Style

Style Clear ................................................................................................................

Press the STYLE CLEAR LCD button in CUSTOM STYLE page 3 to entirely clear the current custom style. The Are you sure? confir- mation prompt will appear. Press YES to clear the style or NO to abort.

Volume & Effects ...............................................................................................

CUSTOM STYLE page 4 includes a range of parameters that let you individually set the volume, reverb, effect, and pan for each part of each custom style section. Use the SECT. parameter to select the section (or ALL sections), and the PART parameter to select the part (or ALL parts). The third LCD button selects VOLUME, REVERB, EFFECT or PAN, and the VALUE (or DEPTH) parameter sets the amount or depth. When VOLUME is selected the SECT. parameter is fixed at ALL and the VALUE range is from 50 to +50, relative to the preset volume of the source style. The REVERB and EFFECT DEPTH ranges are from 0 to 100. The PAN VALUE settings are L10 (full left) C (center) R10 (full right). When EFFECT is selected the TYPE parameter appears and you can also select the effect type via the TYPE LCD button. The avail- able effect types are listed below.

Normally the preset VALUE and EF- FECT TYPE are initially selected. If PART is set to ALL, the R1 part preset values are displayed. If SECT. is set to ALL, the MAIN A preset values are displayed.

Effect type OTHERS may appear if the preset effect type is other than that of what is in the list.

Effect Type List CHORUS 1 CHORUS 2 CHORUS 3 CELESTE 1 CELESTE 2 CELESTE 3

FLANGER 1 FLANGER 2 SYMPHONIC (CVP-79A only) PHASER (CVP-79A only) OFF

52

Custom Style

Save to Disk ............................................................................................................

A complete set of 8 custom styles or individual custom styles can be saved to disk via CUSTOM STYLE page 5.

Once created, your original custom styles can be selected for play- back by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button (its LED will light), and then using the STYLE and LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/ [] buttons to select the custom style you want to play. The selected style can then be played and used with ABC auto accompaniment in ex- actly the same way as the preset styles (page 28).

Since only one type of INTRO, FILL IN, and ENDING section can be recorded for each Custom Style, no A/B varia- tions are produced during playback.

Playing Back Your Custom Styles

After making sure that a properly formatted disk is inserted in the Clavinova disk drive (page 98), use the MEMORY No. and but- tons to select the memory number of the custom style you want to save to disk, or ALL if you want to save a complete set of 8 custom styles. When this is done, press the SAVE LCD button to start saving the data to disk. At this point the name entry display will appear and you can enter a name for the Custom Style disk file in the same way as you entered a name for the Custom Style itself (page 49). Press SAVE when the name has been entered. If a file with the same name already exists the Same name! Overwrite? confirmation prompt will appear. Press OK to overwrite the existing file or CANCEL to abort.

Saved Custom Style files can be loaded via the STYLE FILE LOAD function described in the Style File Load section (page 55).

A single floppy disk can hold up to 60 song files (page 72) and 60 style files (the total number of files however, is approximately 110 files).

Your custom styles must be stored to internal memory before they can be saved to disk (see step 10 of the basic custom style recording proce- dure). If a custom style has not been stored and you attempt to save it to disk, the Please store before saving alert display will appear. If this happens press OK to return to the previous display (CUSTOM STYLE page 3), store the custom style, then try saving again.

Press the [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style mode and re- turn to the normal play mode.

53

Custom Style

Custom Style Alert & Error Displays

The following alert and error displays may appear in the corresponding situations.

Insufficient Memory To Store ..............................................................

This alert message will appear if there is not enough memory to per- form a store operation.

In this case it will be necessary to either delete a style you dont need or simplify the style you are currently recording. Press CANCEL to re- turn to CUSTOM STYLE page 1, at which point you can simplify the current style (by clearing a part, etc.), or DELETE to go to the Delete STYLE ? display:

Use the MEMORY No. and buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then press OK to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.

Memory Full During Recording .........................................................

This alert message will appear if the memory becomes full during recording or editing.

Press OK to return to CUSTOM STYLE page 1 and simplify the style by clearing a part, etc.

The amount of memory being used for the selected style is also shown on the display (in approximate kilobytes) so as to set up the approximate standard which style to delete in relation to the total 160 KB memory space.

54

Custom Style

Exit Before Store ........................................................................................................

If you press [EXIT] button to exit from the Custom Style function before storing the style the following display will appear.

Select a memory number and press YES to store the style and then exit, press NO to exit without storing the style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

Style Change Before Store ..............................................................................

If you attempt to select a different source style before storing the current style you recorded, the following display will appear.

Select a memory number and press OK to store the style and then select the new source style, or press CANCEL to return to the Custom Style mode.

Too Many Files ..............................................................................................................

A single floppy disk can hold up to 60 style files. If you attempt to save more the following display will appear.

Press OK to clear the display, then prepare a new disk and save the file(s).

Disk Full ...............................................................................................................................

If the current disk becomes full during a save operation the following display will appear.

Press OK to clear the display, then either delete any unwanted song files or other files from the disk, or prepare a new disk.

If you want to select a different source style without storing the current style, exit from the CUS- TOM STYLE mode without storing the style (see Exit Before Store above), and then re-enter the CUSTOM STYLE mode.

Style files cannot be deleted from the disk.

55

Style File Load

Style files from optional Yamaha Style File disks, or disks containing custom style files youve created yourself, can be loaded into the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S and played as required.

Loaded disk styles will be retained in memory only until the power is turned off.

One pre-programmed temporary style is automatically loaded into the [DISK/CUSTOM] memory whenever the power is turned on.

ZInsert the Style Disk ......................................................................................

Insert the Style File Disk into the disk drive with the sliding door on the disk facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. When an appropriate Style File disk is inserted, the STYLE FILE LOAD display (see step 2 below) will appear automatically. If the disk is already inserted and the STYLE FILE LOAD display is not showing, press the [DISK/CUSTOM] selector to call the DISK/CUSTOM STYLE display and press the LOAD SINGLE button.

Loading Disk Styles

The No disk! alert will appear if no disk is currently inserted.

The No file! alert will appear if the currently inserted disk contains no style files.

If a disk containing both song and style files is loaded, the SONG PLAY mode will automatically be selected. In this case press the SONG [PLAY] button so that its indicator goes out to exit from the SONG PLAY mode, then press the [DISK/CUSTOM] button.

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

DISK

CUSTOM

56

Style File Load

A set of 8 files saved by using the Custom Style save ALL function (page 45) can be loaded by pressing the ALL LOAD LCD button rather than the LOAD SINGLE button. The rest of the ALL LOAD procedure is essentially the same as the LOAD SINGLE procedure, as follows.

XSelect a Style File .............................................................................................

Use the STYLE FILE and LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/[-] buttons to select the desired style file.

You can preview the selected style by pressing the LISTEN LCD button (the LISTEN function is not available in the ALL LOAD dis- play).

If a tempo is set prior to loading the style, that tempo becomes the default for the loaded style.

Some styles are too large for the LIS- TEN function. In this case the Too much data for listen! Please [LOAD]. alert display will appear. In this case load the style directly as in step 3.

ABC is automatically turned on when the LOAD SINGLE button is pressed and the style is played back automati- cally with the ABC accompaniment in C Major when the LISTEN LCD button is pressed. You can also change the chord or try playing on the keyboard if you like.

CSelect a Memory Number & Load the Style .........................

Use the MEMORY LCD button to select the memory number to which the selected style file is to be loaded (1 through 8), then press the LOAD LCD button to load the style file.

Repeat Step 2 and 3 to select and load more style files as you like.

Press the LISTEN LCD button again or the [START/STOP] button to stop listening.

If the selected memory number already contains a style, the style name will appear on the display. The existing style will be overwritten when a new style is loaded.

It is not necessary to select a memory number when ALL LOAD is selected in step 1. Simply press OK to load or CANCEL to abort.

If there is not enough memory to load the specified file the Not enough memory! Delete an unneeded STYLE ? alert dis- play will appear. In this case it will be necessary to delete a style you dont need before loading the new style. Use the MEMORY No. and buttons to select the number of the style you want to delete, then press DELETE to delete the style, or CANCEL to abort.

The ALL LOAD display is as follows:

When ALL LOAD is executed, all data in the eight memories will be replaced by new data.

57

Style File Load

VEject the Disk When Done ......................................................................

When youve finished with the Style File disk, press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it and return to the normal play mode display. You can return to the normal play mode without removing the disk by pressing the [EXIT] button or a STYLE selector.

The disk drive lamp will light while the style is being loaded. NEVER attempt to remove a disk while the drive lamp is lit.

The LISTEN, LOAD, [EXIT] and style buttons will not function while the style data is being loaded (i.e. while the disk drive lamp is lit).

Using Loaded Style Files

Once loaded, style files can be selected for playback by pressing the [DISK/CUSTOM] button (its LED will light), and then using the STYLE and LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select the style you want to play. The selected style can then be played and used with ABC auto accompaniment in exactly the same way as the preset styles (page 28).

POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

STYLE

CUSTOM

The amount of memory being used for the selected style is also shown on the display (in approximate kilobytes) so as to set up the approximate standard which style to delete in relation to the total 160 KB memory space.

58

Registration Memory

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

MEMORY BANK 1 2 3 4 5

REGISTRATION

ABC FREEZE

ZSet Up the Controls as Required .....................................................

Make the desired control settings. The following settings are memo- rized by the Registration Memory function:

Data Stored By the Registration Memory

Voice parameters

Voice Keyboard Volume Split Point Dual Mode Split Mode Dual Voice Split Voice Dual Balance Split Balance Dual Detune Depth Reverb On/Off Reverb Type Reverb Depth (Total, Rhythm,

Bass, Chord, Keyboard) Effect On/Off

Effect Type Effect Depth (Main Voice, Dual

Voice, Split Voice) Touch Sensitivity Left Pedal Function Right/1 Octave Shift Left Octave Shift 2nd Octave Shift Right/1 Pan Left Pan 2nd Pan Transpose Damper Range Damper Mode (CVP-79A only)

ABC Mode ABC On/Off Small ABC On/Off Harmony On/Off Harmony Type ABC/Song Volume Style Main A/B

Accompaniment parameters

Tempo Rhythm Volume Bass Volume Chord Volume Pad Volume Phrase Volume Harmony Volume

The Registration Memory feature can be used to memorize a number of complete control-panel setups that you can recall when- ever needed. 25 in the CVP-79A and CVP-69/69A (5 banks x 5 memories), and 15 in the CVP-59S (3 banks x 5 memories).

59

Registration Memory

XSelect a Registration Bank (if necessary) .............................

Any of the 5 or 3 Registration Memory banks can be selected by pressing the [BANK] button and selecting the desired bank via the pop- up display LCD buttons (A through E in the CVP-79A/69/69A, and A through C in the CVP-59S).

MEMORY BANK 1 2 3 4 5

REGISTRATION

ABC FREEZE

CRegister the Settings ....................................................................................

While holding the [MEMORY] button, press one of the [REGIS- TRATION] buttons. Any data that was previously in the selected loca- tion is erased and replaced by the new settings. The corresponding Regis- tration Memory number will appear next to the R symbol in the dis- play.

MEMORY BANK 1 2 3 4 5

REGISTRATION

ABC FREEZE

CVP-79A/69/69A

Registration backup is normally ena- bled, so the registration data is re- tained in memory even when the power is turned off. If registration backup is turned off via the Backup function described on page 107, all registration data will be initialized to the factory-preset settings when the power is turned off.

Factory-preset data is provided for all registration banks and memory loca- tions.

Complete sets of registration data can be saved to and loaded from disk as described on page 99.

Registration Memory number

60

Recall the Registered Panel Settings

Simply select the appropriate bank as described above, then press the desired [REGISTRATION] button at any time to recall the memorized settings. The corresponding Registration Memory number will appear next to the R symbol in the display.

A pencil (edit) symbol will appear next to the registration number in the display as soon as any change is made to the panel settings. In other words, if the pencil symbol is showing, the current panel settings are different from those stored in the memory.

Selecting only a different bank will not change the registration settings. The registration settings are recalled only when the [REGISTRATION] button is pressed.

If the Left Pedal function is set to Reg- istration+ (pages 27 and 93), the left pedal can be used to step through the registration memory locations so a completely different set of panel set- tings can be recalled each time the pedal is pressed.

MEMORY BANK 1 2 3 4 5

REGISTRATION

ABC FREEZE

Registration Memory

Registration Memory number edit symbol

The ABC Freeze Function

ABC Freeze remains on even if a different registration bank is selected.

When the ABC FREEZE function is engaged, the accompaniment parameters listed above will not be changed when a registration memory is recalled. This allows you to recall different registration memory set- tings while using Auto Accompaniment, without suddenly disturbing the flow of the accompaniment. The ABC FREEZE function is turned on and off by pressing the [ABC FREEZE] button. The [ABC FREEZE] indicator lights when it is turned on.

MEMORY BANK 1 2 3 4 5

REGISTRATION

ABC FREEZE

61

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S can play back songs youve recorded yourself using the song recorder function described in the next section, and songs on optional Yamaha Disk Orchestra Collection disks (one is supplied with the Clavinova). With Disk Orchestra Collection (DOC) disks the Clavinova will let you enjoy listening to automated performances, or function as your private music tutor, allowing you to practice various parts of a piece while the others are played automatically. The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S also shows you which keys to play with keyboard guide lamps that light up above each key. You can also play in ensemble with the complete Disk Orchestra Collection arrangement.

Different displays will appear depending on the type of data being played. But any type of data can be played back by following the operation procedure described below. Also refer to the Playing Other Types of Music Data section on page 71.

Playback data is not transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector.

Straight Playback

ZEngage the Song Play Mode ................................................................

The Song Play mode is engaged automatically when a song disk is inserted in the disk drive. Insert a disk containing songs youve recorded yourself or a DOC disk into the disk drive with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side facing upward. The disk should click into place and the disk lamp will light briefly while the Clavinova reads and identifies the disk. Once the disk has been identified the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display will appear and the [PLAY] button indicator will light.

If a song disk is already inserted but the Song Play mode is not en- gaged, press the [PLAY] button so that its indicator lights and the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (SONG PLAY page 1) appears.

GUIDERECORDPLAY

SONG

DOC Original song

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

GUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL

62

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

XSelect a Song Number ................................................................................

The current song number and name will be shown on the display along with the currently selected tempo. Use the SONG LCD button to select the desired song number, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons. Select ALL if you want all songs on the disk to be played in order and re- peated until playback is stopped, or RANDOM to play back all songs on the disk in random order until playback is stopped.

If you first select ALL in display page 1, and then select a song in display page 4, all songs will be repeatedly played back starting from the selected song.

If you select a song in display page 1 or 4, and then select 1 SONG repeat mode in page 2, only the selected song will be played back repeatedly until stopped.

During Disk Orchestra Collection play- back the left- and right-hand voice can be changed by using the normal voice selection procedure (page 15). In this case the selected voice also becomes the keyboard voice. The selected voice is shown in the SONG PLAY page 1 display.

When playing back a song recorded on the Clavinova, only the keyboard voice can be changed. The keyboard voice name is shown in the SONG PLAY page 1 display.

Please note that playback may not immediately start while the Clavinova is searching the disk for a selected song after the START LCD button or the panel [START/STOP] button is pressed.

With some songs the displayed meas- ure numbers may not match those marked on the score.

Some songs start after a click count-in.

The playback tempo can be changed freely as required. The preset tempo for the selected song can be recalled at any time by pressing the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons simultaneously.

Some Disk Orchestra software does not produce a tempo display (e.g. free- tempo phrases, etc.). In this case, - - - will appear in place of the tempo on the display, and the measure num- bers shown on the display will not match the actual measure numbers of the song.

The keyboard guide lamps corre- sponding to the keys being played by the RIGHT and LEFT part (or PART 1 and PART 2) will light in real time. The keyboard guide lamps can be turned off via the LAMP LCD button in SONG PLAY display page 3.

Another convenient way to select a song for playback is to use the PAGE buttons to go to page 4 SONG PLAY [LIST] and use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select a song from the list that appears on the display. Up to 8 song titles are shown on the LCD at a time. If more songs are on the disk, the next 8 titles will appear when you scroll past the last title shown on the LCD.

CStart/Stop Playback .......................................................................................

Start playback of the selected song by pressing either the START LCD button or the panel [START/STOP] button. Unless ALL or RANDOM is selected, the selected song will play through to the end and playback will stop automatically. The current measure number and tempo will be shown on the display during playback.

Playback can be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP LCD but- ton (the START LCD button changes to a STOP button once the play- back has started) or the panel [START/STOP] button.

You can exit from the song play mode by pressing the [PLAY] button so that its indicator goes out, or by pressing the [EXIT] button.

DOC Original song

Selected song number and nameKeyboard voice

63

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

Turning Individual Orchestra Parts On or Off Normally the ORCH (or OTHERS) LCD button turns all the orchestra parts (tracks 3 through 10 and the rhythm tracks), or all parts other than parts 1 and 2 on or off at once. You can, however, turn these parts on or off individually via the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display (SONG PLAY page 5).

When playing back Disklavier PianoSoft disks (see Playing Other Types of Music Data, page 71) only the RIGHT or RIGHT and LEFT LCD buttons will appear.

Playing Back Specific Parts

The RIGHT, LEFT, and ORCH LCD buttons (PART 1, PART 2, and OTHERS when an original song disk is being played) can be used to turn playback of the corresponding parts on or off. The buttons are highlighted when the parts are turned on. Use these buttons to select the parts you want to play back. You can, for example, turn off the right and/or left-hand parts so you can practice them on the keyboard. When an original song disk is being played, the tracks turned on and off by the PART 1 and PART 2 buttons can be specified via the SONG PLAY [PART ASSIGN] display (SONG PLAY page 6), described below. The default settings are: PART 1 = Track 1, PART 2 = Track (off).

DOC Original song

VEject the Disk When Done.......................................................................

When youve finished with the currently loaded disk, simply press the disk drive EJECT button to remove it.

NEVER eject a disk or turn the power off while:

1. The disk drive lamp is on. 2. A song is playing.

DOC Original song

64

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

ZSelect the TRACK PLAY Page..............................................................

Use the PAGE buttons to select page 5 the SONG PLAY [TRACK PLAY] display. The numbers of tracks which contain data are shown above the TRACK LCD buttons. Tracks which are enabled for playback are indicated by a box surrounding the track number. Tracks which do not contain data appear as dots.

All track numbers appear whether the tracks contain data or not when a Standard MIDI file song (see Playing Other Types of Music Data, page 71) other than the original song is se- lected.

XMute, Play-enable, or Solo Tracks as Required ...............

Use the TRACK < and > buttons to select a track (an underline cur- sor appears under the selected track). The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used to select tracks. Use the PLAY/OFF button to mute (turn off) or play-enable the selected track. The track number box disap- pears when the track is muted. Any number of tracks can be muted at the same time to leave on the tracks you want to hear play-enabled. The voice used by the currently selected track is shown above the PLAY/ OFF button.

Select a track and press and highlight the SOLO LCD button to hear only the selected track. Press the SOLO LCD button again to disengage the solo function.

65

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

The default settings are: PART 1 = Track 1, PART 2 = Track (off). Tracks 1 through 16 can be selected for both parts 1 and 2, and part 2 can additionally be turned off. The same track cannot be assigned to both parts.

Part Assignment for Original Song Playback

Before an original song disk is played, specify the tracks to be turned on and off by the PART 1 and PART 2 LCD buttons via the SONG PLAY [PART ASSIGN] display.

Use the PAGE buttons to select the SONG PLAY [PART ASSIGN] display (SONG PLAY page 6), then use the PART 1 and PART 2 pa- rameters to assign the desired tracks to the corresponding parts. For either part the corresponding and buttons can be used to select a track, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons can be used once the parameter is selected.

Overall Song Playback Volume Control

The ABC/SONG VOLUME control can be used to control the over- all volume of song playback. Whenever a song is first selected, however, the maximum volume setting (=standard volume level setting) is recalled regardless of the position of the ABC/SONG VOLUME control. The song playback volume can then be adjusted as required.

If ABC is turned on during the playback of an original song that was recorded without ABC, the ABC/SONG VOL- UME control will affect the ABC sound rather than the song playback sound.

ABC cannot be used during playback of a song recorded with ABC or Disk Orchestra Collection playback.

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

The [PART ASSIGN] display will not appear when Disk Orchestra Collection or Disklavier data (see Playing Other Types of Music Data, page 71) is being played.

66

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

Individual Part Volume Control & Voice Selection

Press the [MIXER] button while in the Song Play mode to access the song playback volume param- eters, and the voice selection parameter for the left- and right-hand voice when a Disk Orchestra Collection disk is being played. The MIXER display will disappear when the [MIXER] button is pressed a second time, or when the [EXIT] button is pressed.

Disk Orchestra Collection Disk Playback ..............................

During Disk Orchestra Collection playback the MIXER display has two pages. Page 1 includes the L&R volume and L&R VOICE param- eters. Use the L&R LCD button or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the L&R parameter has been selected to set the volume of the left- and right-hand voice. Use the L&R VOICE and LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the L&R VOICE parameter has been selected to select the voice used for the left- and right-hand parts.

When playing back Disklavier PianoSoft disks (see Playing Other Types of Music Data, page 71) only the L&R VOICE LCD buttons will ap- pear.

The voice change for the left- and right-hand parts by this operation does not affect the keyboard voice. But if you press the panel [VOICE] button, the result will be both the keyboard voice and the left- and right-hand part voice being changed simultaneously.

Page 2 of the MIXER display includes independent volume parameters for the RHYTHM, BASS, ORCH (orchestra), and KBD (keyboard) parts, and a PRESET LCD button that resets all volume parameters to 100. Any of the volume parameters can be selected and incremented by using the corresponding LCD button, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons can be used to increment or decrement the currently selected volume parameter. Press the [+] and [] buttons simultaneously to recall the default (100) volume setting. Several parts can be selected at once by pressing the cor- responding LCD buttons at the same time. The volume of all selected parts can then be adjusted simultaneously.

When a different song is selected the voice and volume settings will be reset to the default settings.

67

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

Original Song Disk Playback ...............................................................

During original song disk playback the MIXER display has 5 pages. The first four pages include independent volume parameters for each of the 16 song tracks. Page five includes the KBD (keyboard) volume pa- rameter and a PRESET LCD button. The volume parameters are adjusted in the same way as described above.

If ABC is turned on during the playback of an original song that was recorded without ABC, the MIXER display will function as the ABC part volume con- trol rather than the song part volume control.

Guided Right- and Left-hand Practice

With this feature, the Clavinova indicates the notes to play via the keyboard guide lamps and waits for you to play the appropriate keys before playing ahead, so you can learn to play the piece at your own pace. The guide lamps can be turned on or off as required. Two guide modes are provided:

Next Note: In this mode the guide lamps of the Clavinova indicate in advance, which note(s) you will have to play next. If you miss the correct tim- ing, the lamp(s) will start to flash while the Clavinova will wait until you play the correct keys. Only then the guide lamp(s) for the next note(s) will light up and you can quickly move your hands to the cor- responding area on the keyboard. This is the default guide mode.

Sound: Both the keyboard guide lamps and sound are used to guide you to the proper notes. In the Sound mode the Clavinova will play ahead for approximately one phrase and then wait until the appropriate notes, as indicated by the keyboard guide lamps, are played. If the appropriate notes are not played for a few seconds, the Clavinova will automati- cally play and repeat the phrase until it is played properly. This is an excellent way to learn to associate the keys with the notes they pro- duce.

When playing back the internal RAM data (see Recording Without a Disk, page 89) or the Standard MIDI File format 1 data (see Playing Other Types of Music Data, below) - - - will appear in the GUIDE MODE param- eter location and only the current notes to be played will be shown on the keyboard guide lamps i.e. the next notes will not appear.

The GUIDE MODE cannot be changed during playback.

When the DOC song recorded for the special guide mode is selected, the special guide mode for that song will be automatically engaged in this case neither of the NEXT NOTE or SOUND sections will be highlighted. But you can re-select the NEXT NOTE or SOUND mode by pressing the corresponding LCD button. (The NEXT NOTE or SOUND mode cannot be re- selected when not at the beginning of a song or when the PHRASE REPEAT or A-B REPEAT mode (page 69) is engaged.)

68

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

The GUIDE display appears automatically when the [GUIDE] button is pressed to turn the guide function on. If the guide function is already on, the PAGE buttons can be used to select the SONG PLAY [GUIDE] display (SONG PLAY page 3). Use the GUIDE MODE NEXT NOTE or SOUND LCD button to select the desired guide mode. The settings of the RIGHT and LEFT LCD buttons (or PART 1 and PART 2) in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (SONG PLAY page 1) will then deter- mine whether the guide function operates for the left-hand part (part 2) only, the right-hand part (part 1) only, or both parts, as shown below.

When the guide function is turned off (i.e. the [GUIDE] button indicator is off) and the SOUND mode is selected, the guide lamps light in real time corre- sponding to the notes played by the left- and right-hand parts, when both the left- and right-hand parts are either on or off. If one or the other of the parts is off, the guide lamps correspond only to the part that is turned off. When the guide function is turned off and the NEXT NOTE mode is se- lected, both the current (flashing) and next notes (continuously-lit) are shown by the guide lamps if either or both parts are turned off. (If both parts are turned on, only the current notes are shown by the guide lamps.)

The guide part can be selected, the guide LAMP can be turned on and off, and the guide function itself can be turned on and off during playback.

Playback tempo can be set to any desired value after a song has been selected by using the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons.

The positions of the guide lamps do not change if the transpose function is used to transpose the pitch of the keyboard.

The [oPAUSE], [rREW] and [fFF] buttons will not operate during play- back when the guide function is in use.

The guide function may not work prop- erly with software which was not pro- duced for independent left- and right- hand playback.

Since the guide phrases used in the SOUND mode are automatically deter- mined by the Clavinova, they may not precisely match the actual musical phrases. Also, the phrases may be- come shorter when the guide function is used for both the left- and right-hand parts.

Left- and right-hand guide

Right-hand guide only

Left-hand guide only

GUIDERECORDPLAY

SONG

When you press the [START/STOP] button or the START LCD but- ton in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (SONG PLAY page 1) to begin playback, the introduction will play automatically but then the Clavinova will stop and wait for you to play the correct note(s). The CVP-79A/69/ 69A/59S indicates the key(s) to be played via the guide lamps above the keyboard. As you play the appropriate notes, the piece will continue, pausing until you play the right notes each time.

If the guide lamps flashing above the keyboard distract you, or you want to try playing along without them, simply press the LAMP LCD button in the SONG PLAY [GUIDE] display to turn the lamps OFF. Repeat to turn the guide lamps back on.

As with regular playback, the song will stop automatically when the end is reached, or it can be stopped at any time by pressing the STOP LCD button in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display (SONG PLAY page 1) or the panel [START/STOP] button.

Press the [GUIDE] button so that its indicator goes out when you want to turn the guide function off.

69

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

Repeat Functions

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S has a range of repeat functions that can be useful aids for learning to play diffi- cult passages. The repeat modes are all accessible via the SONG PLAY [REPEAT] display (SONG PLAY page 2). Use the REPEAT MODE and LCD buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to select the desired repeat mode: OFF, PHRASE, 1 SONG, or A-B REPEAT.

Phrase Repeat (Disk Orchestra Collection only) ...........

Use this function if you want to practice a specific phrase within a song, as indicated by the phrase marks on the Disk Orchestra Collection score.

When the PHRASE repeat mode is selected the PHRASE parameter will appear on the display. Use the PHRASE and LCD buttons, or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the PHRASE parameter is selected, to select the desired phrase number (refer to the Disk Orchestra Collec- tion book that comes with the Disk Orchestra Collection disk). Playback can be started and stopped as described above.

The ALL or RANDOM playback mode (SONG PLAY [MAIN] display) will be disengaged when any of the repeat modes is selected.

Any previously set repeat mode will be reset to OFF when a different song number is selected.

1 Song Repeat ......................................................................................................

When the 1 SONG mode is selected, any song selected and played as described above will play repeatedly until stopped by pressing either the STOP LCD button in the SONG PLAY [MAIN] display or the panel [START/STOP] button.

70

A-B Repeat ...............................................................................................................

This function allows you to specify any section of a song for continu- ous repeat playback.

When the A-B REPEAT mode is selected, A> and B point entry but- tons will appear on the display. While the song is playing, press the A> button once at the beginning of the section to be repeated and then press the B button at the end of the section to be repeated. Repeat playback will begin automatically from the A point as soon as the B point has been specified. The programmed A and B points are retained until a different song number or a different repeat mode is selected, and the A-B repeat playback can be started and stopped again by using the [START/STOP] button.

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

Other Playback Controls

Pause .............................................................................................................................

Press the [o PAUSE] button to temporarily stop song playback. Press the [o PAUSE] button again (or the [START/STOP] button or START LCD button in page 1) to resume playback from the same point.

REW FF PAUSE

SONG CONTROL

Rewind and fast Forward .........................................................................

During song playback the [r REW] and [f FF] buttons function as follows:

REW FF PAUSE

SONG CONTROL

The specified A-B repeat points will be erased when a new song number or another repeat mode is selected.

A 1-measure count-in will normally be produced when phrase or A-B repeat playback is started. A count-in will not be produced for songs that do not contain a rhythm track.

A count-in will not be produced in the 1 SONG repeat playback mode.

When both the A and B points are specified, pressing the B button clears the B point only resulting in repeat playback between the A point and the end of the song. Pressing the A button clears both the A and B points.

71

Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback

While playback is stopped or paused the [r REW] and [f FF] buttons can be used to step backward or forward through the song a measure at a time. Either button can also be held for continuous step- ping in the specified direction.

During playback the [r REW] and [f FF] buttons allow you to move rapidly in the specified direction for as long as the button is held. No sound is produced during [r REW] operation.

The [r REW], [f FF], and [o PAUSE] buttons do not function when playing with the guide function.

Using the [r REW] button may cause the voice, tempo, and/or volume to change.

Playing Other Types of Music Data

In addition to original songs and Disk Orchestra Collection disks, the Clavinova can also play back Yamaha Disklavier PianoSoft disks, disks containing Yamaha ESEQ format sequence data, and disks contain- ing songs recorded in Standard MIDI File format (SMF formats 0 and 1).

The Clavinovas internal tone generator is compatible with the GM System Level 1 voice allocation as well as the Yamaha DOC voice allo- cation.

The [r REW] and [f FF] buttons do not function with SMF format 1 data.

Yamaha ESEQ data recorded on other Clavinovas (CVP- 55/65/75/83S/85A/ 87A/89) will normally be played back with the correct voices. It may be necessary, however, to change the voice numbers of the data to conform to the CVP 79A/69/69A/59S voice allocation when other types of data are played back.

Regardless of the type of software, only the following disk formats can be used: 3.5" 2DD 720 kilobyte format; 3.5" 2HD 1.44 megabyte format.

The SONG PLAY [MAIN] (page 1), [TRACK PLAY] (page 5), and MIXER displays differ depending on the type of data being played. The [PART AS- SIGN] display (page 6) will not appear when Disk Orchestra Collection or Disklavier data is being played.

72

Song Recording

The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S features a built-in sequencer which can be used to independently record up to 16 separate parts of a single musical composition. Each part is recorded on a separate song track. The music data that you record is stored on a 3.5" floppy disk loaded into the Clavinovas disk drive unit. Up to approximately 60 songs can be recorded on a single disk, depending on the amount of data contained in each song. Before you can record, however, you must format a new disk, as described on page 98.

A number of confirmation, information, prompt, alert, and error displays may appear during operation. See the MESSAGES on page 110 if you need more details on any of these messages.

The Clavinova records data using the SMF format 0 and the Clavinovas internal voices which include GM system level 1 compatible voice assignments.

ZInsert a Formatted Disk .............................................................................

If you havent already done so, make sure that a properly formatted disk is loaded into the Clavinova disk drive (see page 98), and that the disks write protect tab is set to the write position (tab closed).

If you insert an unformatted disk, Start disk format? will appear on the dis- play. Press OK to format the disk or CANCEL to abort.

Protected disks (DOC, etc.) cannot be formatted.

Write protect tab closed (unlocked write enabled)

Quick Recording

XEngage the Record Mode ........................................................................

Press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator lights and the QUICK RECORD display appears. If the [RECORD] indicator is lit but the QUICK RECORD display is not showing, use the PAGE buttons to locate it (RECORD display page 1).

FUNCTION MIXER

BEAT

CONTRAST

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE EXIT +

VOLUME

MASTER VOLUME

ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP POP 16BEAT DANCE

POP ROCK BALLAD JAZZ HARMONY

LATIN LATIN POP

TRADI- TIONAL COUNTRY WALTZ DISK

ONE TOUCH SETTING

INTRO A/ FILL TO A

INTRO B/ FILL TO B MAIN A MAIN B ENDING

SMALL ABC ABC ON TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

TEMPO +

PRESETMETRONOME

STYLE

AUTO BASS CHORD START/STOP

REVERB

MAX MAX

MIN MIN

CUSTOM

MEMORY BANK 1

ORGAN

2 3 4 5

STRINGS/ CHOIR BRASS

SAX/ FLUTE BASS

DRUMS/ PERC. SPLIT

DUAL EFFECT CLAVI. TONE/

SYNTHGUITARVIBESHARPSI.E. PIANOPIANOGUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL REGISTRATION

VOICE

ABC FREEZE

GUIDERECORDPLAY

REW FF PAUSE

SONG

SONG CONTROL

73

Song Recording

If you select a song that already contains data, the track(s) which con- tains data can be set to PLAY. This lets you record a new track while listening to previously-recorded material. If you dont want to hear a previously-recorded track while recording, simply use the corresponding LCD button to turn it OFF.

GUIDERECORDPLAY

SONG

CSelect a Song Number ................................................................................

Use the SONG and buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to select a SONG NUMBER between 1 and 60 for the piece you are about to record (up to 60 different songs, each with a different song number, can be recorded on a single disk). Make sure the song number you select has not already been used for a song previously recorded on the disk you are using.

If a song name appears along with the song number, the selected song al- ready contains data.

VSet the Track Modes as Required ...................................................

Two tracks (actually one track and a track group) are available for quick recording: KBD (keyboard) and ABC&RHY (ABC & rhythm). When the QUICK RECORD mode is first selected and a song that does not already contain data is selected, the KBD (keyboard) track will be set to REC and the ABC&RHY track will be set to OFF. In this state the Clavinova is ready to record the keyboard track only. If you also want to record rhythm and ABC accompaniment, use the ABC&RHY LCD but- ton to set the ABC&RHY track to REC, or press the panel [ABC ON] button.

If ABC is already on when the record mode is engaged, the ABC&RHY track will automatically be set to REC.

Harmony data can be recorded by turning the HARMONY mode on. Also, Dual or Split voices can be recorded by engaging the Dual or Split mode. (In this case the KBD part uses two tracks.)

When the ABC&RHY track is set to REC, or when the KBD track is set to REC and the ABC&RHY track is set to PLAY, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide in the syn- chronized start mode before recording is started

When any track is set to REC, the amount of disk space available for recording will appear next to the tempo display (in approximate kilobytes). An empty 2DD/2HD disk should have about 696KB/1407KB (room enough for about 50,000/100,000 notes if no other data is recorded) respectively. When recording is started this display is replaced by the measure number display.

REC mode cannot be selected if the current song position is not the begin- ning of the song e.g. the [r REW] and [f FF] buttons have been used to change the song position.

74

Song Recording

BSelect a Voice ........................................................................................................

Use the VOICE selectors and displays to select the voice you want to record with.

If you will be recording the ABC&RHY tracks you can also select a style.

If you want to try out the selected voice on the keyboard before proceeding turn the synchro-start mode off so that recording doesnt start automatically as soon as you play on the keyboard.

NStart Recording...................................................................................................

Play on the keyboard. Recording will begin automatically as soon as you start playing (the synchro start mode is automatically selected when the QUICK RECORD mode is engaged but it can be disengaged as required). You can also start recording by pressing the panel [START/ STOP] button.

MStop Recording ...................................................................................................

Stop recording by pressing the [START/STOP] button. When record- ing has finished and the recorded data has been written to disk, the mode of the recorded track will automatically switch to PLAY, indicating that the track is ready for playback.

<Play Back the Recording ..........................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to play back your recording. Play along on the keyboard if you like. During playback you can use the [o PAUSE], [r REW], and [f FF] buttons, as described on page 70. You can also change the playback tempo via the TEMPO [+] and [] buttons.

Playback will stop automatically when the end of the recording is reached, or you can press the [START/STOP] button to stop it at anytime.

Press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out, or the [EXIT] button, to exit from the QUICK RECORD mode.

The Clavinova may continue to write data to the disk for a short time after you stop recording. DO NOT eject the disk while the disk drive indicator is lit or flashing.

You can enter a name for the recorded song, as described on page 87. (When a song has been recorded, a tempo- rary name SONG_XXX.MID (XXX is the song number) will be given to the song automatically.)

During recording the [ABC/SONG] volume control and the MIXER display will function as the recorded ABC and/ or keyboard part volume control.

New data cannot be recorded to songs recorded on other instruments, also any edit in the record mode is not possible.

The guide lamps do not light during recording.

[ABC ON] and/or [HARMONY] button indicator(s) automatically go out when the recording of these parts has fin- ished.

When recording has finished, the [EFFECT] is automatically turned off (but the recorded effect remains ac- tive).

75

Song Recording

Multi-track Recording & Playback

ZInsert a Formatted Disk, Engage the Record Mode & Select a Song ........................................................................................................

The first three steps in the multi-track recording process are exactly the same as those for quick recording: insert a formatted disk, press the [RECORD] button to engage the record mode, and select a song number see steps 1, 2, and 3, above.

XSelect the TRACK RECORD Page ..................................................

Use the PAGE buttons to select the TRACK RECORD page (RECORD display page 2). The status of each track is shown above the TRACK LCD buttons. Tracks which are enabled for playback are indi- cated by a box surrounding the track number, and tracks which are record-enabled are indicated by a filled box and inverse number. Tracks which do not contain data appear as dots.

CSet The Track Modes as Required .................................................

Use the TRACK < and > buttons to select a track (an underline cur- sor appears under the selected track). The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used to select tracks. Use the REC/PLAY/OFF LCD button to record-enable, play-enable, or turn off (mute) the selected track. Only tracks which contain data can be play-enabled. The track number box disappears when the track is muted.

76

Song Recording

In the normal single-voice play mode only one track needs to be record-enabled at a time in order to record the keyboard part. If you in- tend to record using the DUAL or SPLIT mode, however, two tracks must be record-enabled only one or two tracks can be record-enabled at a time to record the keyboard part. If ABC accompaniment is turned on tracks 9 through 16 are automatically record-enabled (these are the tracks on which the ABC data is recorded). If the HARMONY function is engaged tracks 6 through 8 are automatically record-enabled (tracks 6 through 8 are used to record the harmony data).

The TRACK f LCD button can also be used to select the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10) if you only want to record the rhythm sound. The cur- sors appear under the 9 and 10 tracks, and the REC/PLAY/OFF LCD button can be used to set them to record-enabled.

VSet All Performance Features As Required .........................

After setting the tracks to be recorded to the record-enable mode, set up all necessary performance features as required: voice, voice mode (normal, dual, or split), style, tempo, etc.

BStart Recording...................................................................................................

Unlike the QUICK RECORD mode the synchronized start mode is automatically turned OFF when the multi-track recording mode is en- gaged. You can, however, engage the synchro start mode at this point so that recording will begin automatically as soon as any key on the key- board is pressed. Otherwise press the [START/STOP] button to start recording on the specified track(s). The current measure number is shown on the display as you record.

The following parameters will be recorded in addition to notes you play:

Two tracks can be record-enabled only when the DUAL or SPLIT mode is ON, otherwise only one track can be record-enabled.

Track 10 (and 9 in some case) can only be used to record the internal rhythm sound and cannot be used to record the keyboard part. Also, the keyboard part should be recorded on a track other than those used for ABC, RHYTHM, and HARMONY.

When the RHYTHM, ABC, and/or HARMONY tracks are set to record- enabled, the synchronized start mode is automatically turned on.

When the RHYTHM tracks (9 and 10) are set to record-enabled, or set to play-enabled and other track(s) are set to record-enabled, the metronome will sound to provide a timing guide in the synchronized start mode before re- cording is started.

If ABC and/or HARMONY is already on when the multi-track recording mode is engaged, the corresponding tracks are automatically record-enabled and the synchronized start mode is automati- cally turned ON.

77

Song Recording

Parameters recorded for Each Track Notes Voice Volume (initially maximum) Expression (CVP-79A only) Pan

Damper pedal Soft pedal Sostenuto pedal Reverb depth Effect depth

Parameters Recorded for the Entire Song

Other Recorded Parameters

Tempo Reverb type Reverb depth Effect type*

Style Main A/B Intro Fill-in Ending

Accompaniment data is distributed to the appropriate tracks. Accompaniment data which is recorded but not listed above includes: * Individual part volume * Modulation * Pitch bend * Pitch bend sensitivity

Harmony data is distributed to the appropriate tracks.

DUAL mode voices are recorded on the two as- signed tracks.

SPLIT mode voices are recorded on the two as- signed tracks.

NStop Recording ...................................................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] button to stop recording.

Recorded tracks are automatically switched to the play mode when recording is stopped, so you can play back the recorded data simply by pressing the [START/STOP] button, or add a new track to your song by selecting a new record track(s) and voice(s) and recording as described above.

Adding New Tracks

If you record on a track that has al- ready been recorded, the previous material will be erased and the new material will be recorded in its place.

Press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out, or the [EXIT] button, to exit from the multi-track recording mode.

If you have recorded using a preset style on RHYTHM tracks 9 and 10, a box symbol will appear next to the RHYTHM character in the display.

* The last recorded track effect takes priority.

78

Song Recording

Punch-in/out Recording

Punch-in/out recording allows you to start recording from any punch-in point within a previously- recorded track and stop recording at any punch -out point, leaving all recorded material up to the punch- in point and following the punch-out point intact. The punch-in recording controls are accessed via the RECORD [PUNCH IN/OUT] display (RECORD display page 3).

ZPlay the Song........................................................................................................

Play back the song in order to locate the point you want to punch-in from.

CSelect a Track .......................................................................................................

Use the TRACK and LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to the select the track to be recorded on. The voice used in the selected track will be shown on the display.

Only tracks which allow punch-in/out recording will appear and can be se- lected. The RHYTHM, ABC, HAR- MONY, and unrecorded tracks cannot be selected.

The Punch-in/out recording function cannot be used when no disk is in the drive.

[fFF] or [rREW] buttons cannot be used while in the [PUNCH IN/OUT] display.

XPause Before the Punch-in Point ....................................................

Press the [o PAUSE] button to pause playback a bit before the point at which you want to start recording. Leave a measure or more before the punch-in point so youll be able to grasp the timing for the punch in.

REW FF PAUSE

SONG CONTROL

TAP SYNCHRO START/STOP

START/STOP

79

Song Recording

NStart Playback & Recording ..................................................................

Press the [START/STOP] or [o PAUSE] button to start playback from the current pause location, then, if the 1ST KEY mode is selected, begin playing at the point you want to record from. Recording will begin as soon as you begin playing on the keyboard. If the PEDAL mode is selected press the left pedal at the point you want to record from.

VSelect a Punch-in Mode .............................................................................

Use the MODE LCD button to select the 1ST KEY or PEDAL punch- in mode.

1ST KEY Recording will begin with the first key played after the PUNCH IN LCD button is pressed.

PEDAL Recording will begin when the left pedal is pressed after the PUNCH IN LCD button is pressed.

BEngage the Punch-in Record Ready Mode ..........................

Press the PUNCH IN LCD button to engage the punch-in record ready mode the PUNCH IN button will be highlighted.

When the PEDAL punch-in mode is selected, the left pedal is used for this function only (the usual pedal function is canceled).

If you press the [START/STOP] button or [o PAUSE] button to start recording, and the [START/STOP] button or the PUNCH OUT LCD button to stop recording without actually recording anything in between, the original data will be left untouched.

MStop Recording ...................................................................................................

Press the PUNCH OUT LCD button to stop recording at the point at which you want to punch out, leaving all data following the punch-out point intact. Use the panel [START/STOP] button to stop recording if you want all data following the punch-out point to be erased.

Press the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out, or the [EXIT] button, to exit from the punch-in/out record mode.

When the PEDAL punch-in mode is selected: Recording can be started directly by

pressing the left pedal while playback is paused (without first pressing the [START/STOP] or [PAUSE] button).

Recording can also be stopped by pressing the left pedal. In this case the data following the punch-out point will be left active.

If you start recording by pressing the left pedal while playback is paused, and stop by the [START/STOP] button, the result will be that all the data after the punch-in point will be erased. (If you stop by using the PUNCH OUT LCD button or the left pedal, only the data between the punch-in and punch- out points will be erased.)

80

Song Recording

The CHORD SEQUENCE function provides a convenient way to enter chord sequences and style changes one at a time.

The Chord Sequence Function

CEnter and Set the Chords and/or Style Changes ...........

To enter a chord either play the chord on the ABC section of the key- board according to the current ABC mode, or use the ROOT and TYPE LCD buttons. The data dial or [+]/[] buttons can be used to select the ROOT or TYPE once the corresponding parameter has been selected by pressing its LCD button. When a chord is entered via the keyboard the appropriate root and type appear in the corresponding parameter loca- tions. To enter a style change (style, section, and tempo) simply make the

ZEngage the Chord Sequence Function ....................................

After engaging the QUICK RECORD mode (RECORD display page 1) and selecting a song number, press the CHORD SEQ. LCD button. The CHORD SEQUENCE display will appear, ABC will be turned on, and if the FULL KEYBOARD mode is currently selected the FIN- GERED CHORD mode will be selected instead.

XMove the Cursor To the Entry Point ..............................................

As necessary, use the CURSOR < and > LCD buttons to move the triangular cursor to the point at which you want to enter a chord or style change.

The chord Sequence function cannot be used when no disk is in the disk drive.

The chord sequence data will replace any previous data on the ABC and rhythm tracks that was recorded in the quick record or multi-track record modes.

Up to 999 measures can be recorded using the Chord Sequence function.

The chord input resolution will be automatically selected according to the current style. For 3/4, 4/4, and 5/4 time styles, one chord can be entered on every 8th note or 8th-note triplet. For other time signatures one chord can be entered for each measure.

One style change or section change (except Fill-in and Break) can be made at the beginning of each measure. The Button not valid! Enter at top of measure. alert display will appear if you attempt to enter the change in any other place than the top of measure.

ABC cannot be turned off after the chord sequence function is engaged. But the ABC mode can be altered between FINGERED and SINGLE- FINGER in the pop-up display by pressing the [ABC ON] button. The split point can also be altered.

If you enter the ABC part volume data via the MIXER display and the SET LCD button, the volume event symbol will appear in the box on the right side of the LCD display. (The volume event is automatically entered at the begin- ning of a song.)

81

Song Recording

appropriate selections in the normal way. Once the chord and/or style change has been entered, press the SET LCD button to actually input the chord and/or style change at the current cursor location. The loca- tion in the graphic measure symbol will become bold and the set data will be shown on the display: the time signature, the style name and section to the left, and the chord, tempo, and rhythm on/off status (see below) in the box to the right.

Continue entering chords and style changes in this manner until your sequence is complete. The data recorded by the Chord Sequence function is listed below.

Data Recorded By the Chord Sequence Function

Style Accompaniment Section (MAIN A & B/Intro/Ending/Fill-in/Break) Chord ABC part volume (MIXER settings) Tempo Rhythm on/off ABC/SONG volume (as an initial setting only)

The types of chords that can be entered are the same as those listed for the ABC fin- gered mode (see page 36). In addition - - - (i.e. no chord) can be entered via the TYPE LCD button. On-bass chords can be entered via the keyboard.

The number of each measure is shown to the left of the graphic measure symbols on the display.

See Chord Sequence Page-2 Functions, below, for other useful editing features.

If no chords are entered (i.e. chord type is set to - - -), the result will be a rhythm-only sequence.

A Break can be produced by both setting the chord type to - - - and rhythm sound to OFF (see Rhythm OFF/ON, below).

The same chord, as set previously (i.e. the same chord shown in the box), cannot be entered even if the SET LCD button is pressed.

Only data other than chord data can be entered by first moving the cursor and making the required changes without enter- ing any chord (the ROOT and TYPE LCD sections should be blank), and pressing the SET LCD button.

If a different style with another time signa- ture is selected after chords have been entered, the timing of the chords will be changed accordingly.

The chord sequence data now resides in tracks 9 through 16, and can be played back in the normal way. Add other tracks as required by using the standard track selec- tion and recording procedure. You can also record over individual tracks of the se- quence and replace them with original material if you like by using the standard track selection and record procedure.

The song recorded via the Chord Sequence function can be modified later by re-enter- ing the Chord Sequence mode and making the required changes. But please note that the track data recorded over by using the standard recording procedure will be re- turned back to the preset style data.

VStop Recording .............................................................................................

When all the required chords and style changes have been entered, enter an END MARK (press END MARK in display page 2), then press the END button in display page 3. The Are You Sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to save the recorded data and finish recording or NO to abort. Once the data has been saved, the Chord Sequence function will automatically be exited.

It is also possible to leave the Chord Sequence function during recording by pressing the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indicator goes out. In this case, if any data is left unsaved, the Save recorded data? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to save the recorded data and then exit from the Chord Sequence function, NO to exit without saving the data, or CANCEL to return to the Chord Sequence function.

Chord Sequence Page 2 & 3 Functions

The CHORD SEQUENCE page-2 and page-3 displays contain a number of functions that can make the chord-entering process more efficient and versatile.

82

Song Recording

Delete Press the DELETE LCD button to delete the data at the current cursor location. The Are you sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to delete or CANCEL to abort.

End Mark Press the END MARK LCD button to enter an end mark at the cur- rent cursor location. An END MARK signifies the end of the song, and should always be entered to properly end each song. The cursor can not be moved past an end mark. An end mark can be deleted us- ing the DELETE LCD button, above.

Rhythm OFF/ON Pressing the RHYTHM OFF LCD button turns the rhythm sound off i.e. the start of a rhythm break from the current cursor location. This button has no effect if the rhythm is already off. The RHYTHM ON LCD button turns the rhythm back on after a rhythm break. This button has no effect if the rhythm is already on.

All Delete When the ALL DELETE LCD button is pressed the Are you sure? confirmation display will appear. Press YES to erase all chord and style change data, or NO to abort.

Unless the end mark is entered, the song will end at one measure after the last data, or at the end of the ending section if it is entered.

The end mark symbol will appear in the box on the right side of the LCD display when it is entered.

The rhythm on/off status is shown in the box to the right on the LCD display.

Check Play The CHECK PLAY LCD button starts playback of the programmed chord sequence. The sequence will play through until the end of the data is reached or until the CHECK PLAY LCD button is pressed a second time.

End Pressing the END LCD button initiates final processing of the se- quence data and saves it to the disk. The Are you sure? confir- mation prompt will appear: press YES to save it to disk and finish recording the chord sequence or NO to abort. Once the data has been processed and saved to disk the Chord Sequence mode is automati- cally exited.

83

Song Recording

Other Song Recording Functions

Track Mix

The TRACK MIX function combines the data from two specified tracks and places the result in a third specified track. The TRACK MIX function is accessed via the RECORD [TRACK MIX] display (RECORD display page 4).

Only the data-containing tracks will appear and can be selected for TRK A and B. In addition no track (- -) can also be selected for TRK B. In this case the result will be the copy of TRK A to TRK C.

The initial data and all data other than note data is taken from that of track A.

ZSpecify the Tracks to be Mixed ..........................................................

Use the TRK A and TRK B LCD buttons or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the TRK A or TRK B parameter has been selected to specify the tracks you want to mix. The initial voices used for the A and B tracks are shown along with the track number.

XSpecify the Destination Track .............................................................

Use the TRK C LCD button or the data dial or [+]/[] buttons once the TRK C parameter has been selected to specify the track you want the mixed data to be placed in. Any previous data in the destination track (TRK C) will be erased.

CExecute the Track Mix Operation ....................................................

Press the MIX LCD button to begin execution of the track mix op- eration. The Are you sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to mix the specified tracks or NO to cancel the operation.

When this is done the MIX LCD button will change to UNDO, al- lowing you to undo the track mix operation and return to the pre-mixed data before selecting a different track or exiting from the Track Mix mode.

Press the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indica- tor goes out to exit from the Track Mix function.

A bar graph indicating the progress of the track mix operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check if the results are as you expected or not, by starting and stop- ping playback by using the [START/ STOP] button before the UNDO opera- tion.

Track Mix, Track Delete, Track Quantize, Initial Edit, and Rename functions, described below, cannot be used when no disk is in the disk drive.

84

Track Delete

Song Recording

The TRACK DELETE function accessed via the RECORD [TRACK DELETE] display (RECORD display page 5) can be used to delete all data from any specified track.

ZSpecify the Track to be Deleted ........................................................

Use the TRACK and buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to specify the track you want to delete.

XExecute the Delete Operation .............................................................

Press the DELETE LCD button to begin execution of the track delete operation. The Are you sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to delete the specified track or NO to cancel the operation. After processing the DELETE LCD button changes to UNDO, which can be used to undo the delete operation before selecting a different track or exiting from the Track Delete mode.

Press the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indica- tor goes out to exit from the Track Delete function.

Track Quantize

You can tighten up the timing of a recorded part by aligning all notes to specified beats via the TRACK QUANTIZE function accessed via the RECORD [TRACK QUANTIZE] display (RECORD dis- play page 6).

A bar graph indicating the progress of the track delete operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check if the results are as you expected or not, by starting and stop- ping playback by using the [START/ STOP] button before the UNDO opera- tion.

ZSpecify the Track to be Quantized .................................................

Use the TRACK and buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to specify the track you want to quantize.

Only the data-containing tracks will appear and can be selected.

Only the data-containing tracks will appear and can be selected.

85

Song Recording

XSpecify the Quantize Size ..................................................................

Use the LCD button below the note symbol to select quantize size i.e. the beats to which the notes in the selected track will be aligned:

32nd notes

16th note triplets

16th notes

8th note triplets

8th notes

quarter-note triplets

quarter notes

3

3

3

CExecute the Quantize Operation ......................................................

Once the required quantize size has been selected press the QUANTIZE LCD button to quantize the selected track. The Are you sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to quantize the data or NO to abort. When this is done the QUANTIZE LCD button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the quantize operation and return to the pre-quantized data before selecting a different track or exiting from the Track Quantize mode.

Press the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indica- tor goes out to exit from the Track Quantize function.

Only note and voice data is quantized.

A bar graph indicating the progress of the quantize operation will appear while the data is being processed.

You can check if the results are as you expected or not, by starting and stop- ping playback by using the [START/ STOP] button before the UNDO opera- tion.

ZSelect a Song & Engage the Edit Mode....................................

Use the SONG and buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to specify the song you want to edit, then press the EDIT LCD button to go to the INITIAL EDIT pages.

Initial Edit

The values of the initial data can be changed for each track or the entire song by using the INITIAL EDIT parameters accessible via the RECORD [INITIAL EDIT] display (RECORD display page 8).

86

XEdit the Parameters .......................................................................................

Three INITIAL EDIT display pages are available. Use the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the various pages and edit the parameters each contains. It is possible to start and stop playback by using the [START/ STOP] button while editing the parameters in order to hear how the changes affect the sound.

Song Recording

Page 1: INITIAL EDIT [SONG] This page contains the REVERB TYPE and DEPTH parameters, the TEMPO parameter, and the WRITE LCD button which is used to actually write all initial data changes once they have been made as required. The REVERB TYPE and DEPTH parameters and the TEMPO parameter affect the entire song and are edited by using the corresponding LCD buttons to select each parameter, and then the data dial or the [+]/[] buttons to edit (see page 22 for information on the reverb types and depth settings, and page 29 for tempo informa- tion).

The data may not be played back accurately if you use the [r REW] and [f FF} buttons while editing the initial data.

In the Initial Edit mode the panel buttons relating to the editable param- eters cannot be used.

Page 2: INITIAL EDIT [TRACK] Page 2 includes VOICE, VOLUME, and PAN parameters that can be set individually for each track. The VOICE parameter sets the initial voice for the track; the VOLUME parameter sets the initial volume of the track, and the PAN parameter sets the initial pan position of the track. Use the TRACK and buttons or the data dial or the [+]/ [] buttons once the TRACK parameter has been selected to specify the track you want to edit, then set the parameters in this and the following page as required.

Page 3: INITIAL EDIT [TRACK] Page 3 contains EFFECT TYPE and DEPTH parameters and a RE- VERB DEPTH parameter that can be set individually for each track. The track to be edited is selected in page 2 (see above), and the pa- rameters can be edited as required. See page 24 for information on the available effect types and depth settings.

Only the data-containing tracks will appear and can be selected.

The VOLUME parameters initial default value is 100 for every track. This value can only be decreased.

The effect type and depth may not be able to be set as expected in some cases. The other tracks are also affected and the last set track effect type takes priority.

The VOICE and EFFECT TYPE parameters cannot be edited for the non-keyboard tracks (i.e. the RHYTHM, ABC, and/or HARMONY tracks).

87

Song Recording

CWrite the Changes ...........................................................................................

When all the initial data changes have been made as required, go back to INITIAL EDIT page 1 and press the WRITE LCD button. The Are you sure? confirmation display will appear. Press YES to actually make the specified changes, or NO to abort. When this is done the WRITE LCD button will change to UNDO, allowing you to undo the write operation and return to the pre-edited data before making any other edits or exiting from the Initial Edit mode.

VExit ....................................................................................................................................

Press the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indica- tor goes out to exit from the Initial Edit mode. If you do this after making any edits that you have not yet written, the Write edited data? confirmation prompt will appear. Press YES to write the edited data and then exit from the Initial Edit mode, NO to exit without writing the data, or CANCEL to return to the Initial Edit mode.

ZSelect a Song & Engage the Rename Mode ........................

Use the SONG and buttons, the data dial, or the [+]/[] buttons to specify the song you want to rename, then press the RENAME LCD button to go to the NAMING display.

Renaming Song Files

This function lets you enter an original name for, or change the existing name of, any song file on the disk recorded by the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S. The rename function is accessed via the RECORD [RE- NAME] display (RECORD display page 7).

All edited data for any number of tracks within one song can be written in a one-time WRITE operation.

You can check if the results are as you expected or not, by starting and stop- ping playback by using the [START/ STOP] button before the UNDO opera- tion.

88

XEnter a Name .........................................................................................................

The current song file name appears in the upper right corner of the display. Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor at the character you want to change (song names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the c.set LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The c.del LCD but- ton can be used to back up one space and delete a character.

Song Recording

CRegister the Name ...........................................................................................

When the name is complete press the OK LCD button to register the name for the current song file, or CANCEL to abort.

Press the [EXIT] button, or the [RECORD] button so that its indica- tor goes out, to exit from the Rename mode.

89

Recording Without a Disk

The Clavinova has enough internal RAM memory (about 25KB) to allow recording for a while even if a disk is not loaded (up to approxi- mately 2,500 notes if no other data is recorded).

Song Recording

Chord sequence data is not recorded to internal RAM memory. The But- ton not valid ! alert display will appear.

The Punch-in/out Recording, Track Mix, Track Delete, Track Quantize, Initial Edit, and Rename functions (i.e. RECORD display page 3 to the last page) cannot be used with data in the internal RAM memory. The Button not valid ! alert display will appear.

Playback

Original recordings can be played back and controlled in the same way as described in the Disk Orchestra Collection & Song Playback section, beginning on page 61. You can individually select tracks to play back (page 63), use the guide modes and keyboard guide lamps with the data recorded on any two tracks (page 67), and use the A-B repeat func- tion (page 70).

QUICK RECORD display when recording to internal RAM memory

SONG PLAY [MAIN] display when playing back internal RAM memory song

If you accidentally record without loading a disk, make sure you use the SONG COPY function (described on page 102) to copy the recorded data to disk if you want to keep the recorded data (the internal RAM memory is not backed up). This is necessary because the internal RAM memory is cleared automatically when a Disk Orchestra Collection, Disklavier PianoSoft, Style File disk, or a disk containing songs recorded on a different instrument is loaded. The RAM is also cleared when an original song disk is loaded and a song is selected.

90

The Utility Functions

The utility functions described in this chapter include keyboard, disk, MIDI, and general functions that significantly enhance the versatility and flexibility of the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S. All of the utility functions are selected and set in the same way for consistent, easy operation:

ZPress the [FUNCTION] button so that its indicator lights.

FUNCTION MIXER

VPress the [EXIT] button, or the [FUNCTION] button so that its indi- cator goes out when done.

EXIT

CUse the LCD buttons, data dial, and/or [+]/[] buttons to select and set the individual parameters as required.

+

XUse the PAGE [<] and [>] buttons to select the page containing the desired function.

DISPLAY HOLDPAGE

The data dial and the [+]/[] buttons can be used for the parameters once selected by the LCD button in the highlighted round-framed parameter box.

91

The Utility Functions

Keyboard

Transpose .........................................................................................................

The Transpose function makes it possible to shift the pitch of the entire keyboard up or down in semitone intervals up to a maximum of two octaves (from 24 through 0 to +24). Transposing the pitch of the Clavinova keyboard makes it easier to play in difficult key signatures, and you can simply match the pitch of the keyboard to the range of a singer or other instrumentalist.

Use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to set the desired degree of transposition.

Octave Shift ......................................................................................................

This function includes three parameters which determine whether the left-hand voice in a split keyboard setup (LEFT), the 2nd voice in the dual mode (2ND), and the right-hand or main voice (RIGHT/ 1) will be shifted up or down one octave.

Press the LEFT, 2ND, or RIGHT/1 LCD button as many times as necessary to set as required:

1 Corresponding voice shifted down one octave.

0 No shift. (Default for the RIGHT/1 and 2nd voices.)

+1 Corresponding voice shifted up one octave. (Default for the LEFT voice.)

Touch Sensitivity ......................................................................................

The Clavinova can be set to one of five different types of key- board touch sensitivity to match different playing styles and prefer- ences. Press the KEY TOUCH button as many times as necessary to select the desired touch response setting.

SOFT 2 Allows maximum loudness to be produced with very light key pressure.

SOFT 1 Not as sensitive as the SOFT 2 setting, but maximum loudness can still be easily produced with relatively light key pressure.

NORMAL Produces a fairly standard keyboard response. (Default.)

HARD 1 Requires the keys to be played quite hard to produce maximum loudness.

HARD 2 Requires the keys to be played very hard to produce maxi- mum loudness.

The Touch Sensitivity setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page VOICE SETTING param- eter is turned on (page 107), otherwise the NORMAL setting is automatically selected whenever the POWER switch is turned on.

Press the [] and [+] buttons simultaneously to restore normal keyboard pitch (0).

The Transpose setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page VOICE SETTING parameter is turned on (page 107), otherwise the Transpose is always set to 0 when the power is turned on.

The transpose function does not affect the Drum Kit voices.

Notes below and above the original 88-key range of the Clavinova sound one octave higher and lower, respectively.

The Octave Shift setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page VOICE SETTING param- eter is turned on (page 107).

Notes below and above the original 88-key range of the Clavinova sound one octave higher and lower, respectively.

In the normal play mode (i.e. single voice mode) only the RIGHT/1 setting is effective.

92

Sound

The Utility Functions

Tune .........................................................................................................................

The Tune function makes it possible to tune the Clavinova over about a 26-Hertz (100-cent) range in 0.2-Hertz intervals. A hun- dred cents equals one semitone, so the tuning range provided allows fine tuning of overall pitch over a range of approximately a semitone. This function is useful for tuning the Clavinova to match other instru- ments or recorded music. Normal pitch is A3 = 440 Hertz.

Use the TUNE and LCD buttons to set the tuning as re- quired. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the TUNE parameter has been selected. The default value of 440.0Hz can be instantly recalled by pressing the TUNE and LCD but- tons simultaneously.

The Tune setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page TUNE/MICRO TUNING parameter is turned on (page 107), otherwise the tuning is always set at 440.0Hz when the power is turned on.

The Tune function does not affect the Drum Kit voices.

CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

Pedal

Pan ............................................................................................................................

The pan positions of the left-hand voice in a split keyboard setup (LEFT), the 2nd voice in the dual mode (2ND), and the right-hand or main voice (RIGHT/1) can be individually set via the appropriate PAN parameters.

Press the LEFT, 2ND, or RIGHT/1 LCD button according to the voice you want to pan, then use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to set the pan position as required. The graphic bar shows the approximate pan position between full left (L) and full right (R). The default position can be instantly recalled by pressing the [+] and [] buttons simultaneously.

The pan setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page VOICE SETTING parameter is turned on (page 107).

The default pan position for some voices is center, while some voices feature keyboard scaling i.e. the keyboard is spread across the stereo sound field (see the voice list on page 116). Both types appear in center position on the LCD. Any changes in the pan setting are then relative to the default posi- tion.

The Drum Kit voices have special pan set- tings for each individual instrument.

The PAN setting affects all voices.

The PAN setting affects the keyboard sound only.

In the normal play mode (i.e. single voice mode) only the RIGHT/1 setting is effective.

93

The Utility Functions

Left Pedal Function ........................................................................................

The left pedal has a number of functions which can be selected via the LEFT PEDAL function. Use the LEFT PEDAL and LCD but- tons to select the desired function. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used. The default setting SOFT can be instantly recalled by pressing the LEFT PEDAL and LCD buttons simultaneously.

Soft Pressing the soft pedal subtly reduces the volume and slightly changes the timbre of notes played. The SOFT function is automatically selected when the POWER switch is initially turned on.

Start/Stop The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [START/STOP] button. For details on the START/STOP function, refer to the Accompani- ment section, pages 30, 32.

Harmony On/Off Allows the Harmony function (page 41) to be turned on or off as required while playing so that harmony can be applied only to specific notes or phrases.

Registration + Steps through the registration memory locations so a completely different set of panel settings can be recalled each time the pedal is pressed. See page 60 for details on the registration memory.

Intro A/Fill to A The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [INTRO A/FILL TO A] button. See pages 30, 32 for details.

Intro B/Fill to B The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [INTRO B/FILL TO B] button. See pages 30, 32 for details.

Ending/rit. The left pedal performs the same function as the accom- paniment section [ENDING] button. See page 32 for details.

Break Pressing the left pedal produces a break in the accom- paniment for as long as the pedal is held. For details on the BREAK function, refer to the Accompaniment sec- tion, page 32.

Sostenuto The left pedal functions in the same way as the CVP- 79A/69/69A sostenuto pedal (see page 26).

Damper Range .....................................................................................................

Determines whether the damper pedal affects the right-hand, left- hand, or both voices in a split setup.

Press the DAMPER RANGE LCD button as many times as necessary to select the desired setting.

R The damper affects only the right-hand voice. (Default.)

L The damper affects on the left-hand voice.

L&R The damper affects both the left-hand and right-hand voices.

The Damper Range setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page PEDAL parameter is turned on (page 107).

(CVP-59S only)

The Left Pedal function setting is re- tained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page PEDAL parameter is turned on (page 107).

If the left pedal is assigned to the Registration + function, the setting of the left pedal function in the registra- tion memory is not recalled.

94

The Utility Functions

Damper Mode (CVP-79A only) ............................................................

Sets the damper pedal for on/off or continuous operation (refer to page 26). Press the DAMPER MODE LCD button to alternately select the continuous and switch modes.

CONT. Continuous damper pedal operation. (Default.)

SWITCH On/off damper pedal operation.

The Damper Mode setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page PEDAL parameter is turned on (page 107).

MIDI 1

MIDI, the Musical Instrument Digital Interface, is a world-standard communication interface that al- lows MIDI-compatible musical instruments and equipment to share musical information and control one another. This makes it possible to create systems of MIDI instruments and equipment that offer far greater versatility and control than is available with isolated instruments. The MIDI parameters included in the CVP-79A/69/69A/59Ss three MIDI function pages provide extensive flexibility in adapting the Clavinova to just about any MIDI system.

The parameters contained in the MIDI 1 function page include the SEND CH, which determines the BASIC and LEFT/2 voice MIDI send channels, LOCAL control setting on or off, and the CLOCK set- ting internal or external.

Send Channel .......................................................................................................

In any MIDI control setup, the MIDI channels of the transmitting and receiving equipment must be matched for proper data transfer (there are 16 MIDI channels). This function sets the basic and left-hand/2nd MIDI send (transmit) channels of the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S. The LEFT/2 parameter applies to the left-hand voice in split keyboard setups and to the 2nd voice in the dual mode. All other keyboard data is transmitted via the BASIC channel. Both parameters can be turned OFF or set to any channel from 1 through 16.

Press the BASIC or LEFT/2 LCD button according to the channel you want to set, then use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to set the chan- nel as required.

The Send Channel settings are re- tained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned on (page 107), otherwise the default BASIC send channel is 1 and the default LEFT/2 send channel is OFF.

MIDI Reception The CVP-79A/69/69A/59S always receives MIDI data in the Multi- Timbre mode. This is a mode in which the Clavinova voices can be independently controlled on different MIDI channel numbers (1 through 16) by an external MIDI device.

95

The Utility Functions

Local Control ON/OFF .................................................................................

Local Control refers to the fact that, normally, the Clavinova key- board controls its internal tone generator, allowing the internal voices to be played directly from the keyboard. This situation is Local Control ON since the internal tone generator is controlled locally by its own keyboard.

Local control can be turned off, however, so that the Clavinova key- board does not play the internal voices, but the appropriate MIDI infor- mation is still transmitted via the MIDI OUT connector when notes are played on the keyboard. At the same time, the internal tone generator responds to MIDI information received via the MIDI IN connector. This means that while an external MIDI sequencer, for example, plays the Clavinovas internal voices, an external tone generator can be played from the Clavinova keyboard.

Press the LOCAL LCD button to alternately turn local control ON and OFF.

The Local setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the default setting is ON.

MIDI 2

The MIDI 2 function page contains the MIDI FILTER settings which can be used to turn transmission and reception of certain types of MIDI data on or off.

Clock ..............................................................................................................................

This function determines whether the Clavinovas auto-accompani- ment or song record/playback timing is controlled by the Clavinovas own internal clock or an external MIDI clock signal received from exter- nal equipment connected to the MIDI IN connector.

Press the CLOCK LCD button to alternately select the EXT. (exter- nal) or INT. (internal) clock mode.

The Clock setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the default setting is INT.

If the Clock Mode is set to EXT. and a MIDI clock signal is not being received from an external source, the rhythm, ABC and other clock-dependent fea- tures will not operate.

96

Program ......................................................................................................................

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI program change num- bers received from an external keyboard or other MIDI device, causing the correspondingly numbered Multi-Timbre mode voice to be selected on the corresponding channel (the keyboard voice does not change). The Clavinova will normally also send a MIDI program change number whenever one of its voices is selected, causing the correspondingly num- bered voice or program to be selected on the external MIDI device if the device is set up to receive and respond to MIDI program change num- bers.

This function makes it possible to cancel program change number reception and transmission so that voices can be selected on the Clavinova without affecting the external MIDI device, and vice versa.

Press the PROGRAM LCD button to alternately turn program change number reception and transmission ON (SEND&RECEIVE) and OFF.

The Utility Functions

The Program setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the default setting is SEND&RECEIVE.

Control ..........................................................................................................................

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI control change data received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the corre- sponding Multi-Timbre mode voice to be affected by pedal and other control settings received from the controlling device (the keyboard voice is not affected). The Clavinova also transmits MIDI control change information when either of its pedals are operated.

This function makes it possible to cancel control change data recep- tion and transmission if you do not want the Clavinova to be affected by control change data received from an external device or vice versa.

Press the CONTROL LCD button to alternately turn control change data reception and transmission ON (SEND&RECEIVE) and OFF.

The Control setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the default setting is SEND&RECEIVE.

Start/Stop ..................................................................................................................

Normally the Clavinova will respond to MIDI start and stop com- mands received from an external MIDI device or keyboard, causing the auto-accompaniment or song record/playback functions to start or stop in the same way as the panel [START/STOP] button. The Clavinova also transmits MIDI start and stop commands when the corresponding func- tions are operated.

This function makes it possible to cancel start/stop command recep- tion and transmission if you do not want the Clavinova to be affected by start/stop commands received from an external device or vice versa.

Press the START/STOP LCD button to alternately turn start/stop command reception and transmission ON (SEND&RECEIVE) and OFF.

The Start/Stop setting is retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the default setting is SEND&RECEIVE.

97

The Utility Functions

MIDI 3

The MIDI 3 function page contains the TRANSPOSE and SEND parameters which determine whether MIDI note data will be affected by the Transpose setting (page 91), and whether the ABC, rhythm, and harmony data will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal.

Transpose .................................................................................................................

The RECEIVE parameter determines whether MIDI note pitch re- ceived by the Clavinova will be affected by the setting of the Transpose function (see page 91), while the SEND parameter determines whether MIDI note pitch transmitted by the Clavinova will be affected by the setting of the Transpose function.

Press the RECEIVE or SEND LCD button to alternately turn transpo- sition of received or transmitted MIDI data ON and OFF.

Send ................................................................................................................................

These parameters determine whether MIDI data corresponding to ABC/rhythm and harmony playback will be transmitted via the MIDI OUT terminal. Press the ABC&RHY or HARMONY button to alter- nately turn transmission of the corresponding data ON (916ch / 68ch) or OFF. When on, the ABC and rhythm data is transmitted on MIDI channels 9 through 16, and the harmony data is transmitted on channels 6 through 8.

The Send settings are retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise both parameters are turned OFF.

If you intend to send the ABC/rhythm or harmony data via MIDI, it is a good idea to set the BASIC and LEFT/2 channels (page 94) to the different channels than the ones used for ABC/ rhythm (916) and harmony (68) data to avoid data conflict problems.

If either of these parameters is on, the ABC/rhythm and/or harmony data will be sent even if the BASIC send chan- nel is turned OFF.

The actual note number received or transmitted is not affected. The trans- position is produced by the MIDI con- trol change RPN coarse tune data.

The MIDI Transpose settings are retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page MIDI parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise the RECEIVE parameter is turned On and the SEND parameter is turned OFF.

98

The FORMAT page provides access to the Disk Format function which allows new disks or disks formatted on other equipment to be formatted for use with the Clavinova.

The Clavinova uses only 3.5" 2DD or 2HD floppy disks. We recommend that you use Yamaha disks. Before you can use a new disk for recording, the disk must be formatted so that the Clavinova can rec- ognize it and correctly write the music data onto it.

The Utility Functions

Format

ZInsert the Disk To Be Formatted ......................................................

Insert a new blank disk. Make sure that the disks write protect tab is set to the write position (tab closed), and insert the new disk into the disk drive unit with the sliding door facing the drive slot and the label side of the disk facing upward. The disk should click securely into place, and the disk drive lamp should light briefly. The Start disk for- mat? display will automatically appear if an unformatted disk is in- serted. Press the OK LCD button to format the disk or the CANCEL LCD button to abort.

Write protect tab closed (unlocked write enabled)

XConfirm & Start the Format Operation ......................................

When Are you sure? appears press the YES LCD button to confirm and continue, or the NO LCD button to cancel the operation. This extra confirmation step is necessary because formatting completely erases any data that is already on the disk make sure that the disk youre about to format does not contain any important data!

Formatting will begin the instant you select YES. The progress of the format operation will be indicated by a bar-graph on the display. When formatting is complete, you can go ahead and record using the Song Record function, use the Song Copy function to copy songs, or save other data to the disk.

If you access the FORMAT function page via the [FUNCTION] and PAGE buttons (i.e. you want to format a disk that is already inserted), press the START LCD button before proceeding to step 2 below.

Protected disk! will appear if a pro- tected disk (DOC, etc.) that cannot be formatted is loaded in the drive.

The No disk! alert will appear if you attempt to execute a format operation when there is no disk inserted in the disk drive.

2DD disks are formatted into 720 KB, while 2HD disks are formatted into 1.44 MB.

The song record or playback mode will be turned off if the FORMAT operation is executed while they are on.

99

The Utility Functions

Registration

The REGISTRATION function page provides access to the Clavinovas Registration and All Setup file disk operations save, load, delete, and rename.

Before selecting the Registration function, make sure that the disk you want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive, and both the song record or playback modes are not engaged.

ZSelect a File Type ..............................................................................................

Use either of the first two LCD buttons to select either REGISTRA- TION or ALL SETUP, according to the type of file you want to save, load, delete, or rename.

Registration A Registration file containing all data in the 25 or 15 Regis- tration memories.

All Setup An All Setup file containing all panel setup data in the list on page 122 including Registration data.

XSelect a File Operation ...............................................................................

Use the fourth LCD button to select the LOAD, SAVE, DELETE, or RENAME operation.

CPress START ............................................................................................................

Press the START LCD button to begin the selected operation, then proceed according to the selected operation as described below:

The Registration function cannot be used when the song record or play- back mode is engaged the Button not valid! alert display will appear.

SAVE ...............................................................................................................................

If you select SAVE the name entry display will appear and you will have to enter a name for the file to be saved.

See page 58 for the list of data con- tained in the Registration memory.

100

The Utility Functions

An empty name appears in the upper right corner of the display. Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor where you want to enter a character (file names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [+]/[] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the c.set LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The c.del LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete a character.

When the name is complete press the SAVE LCD button to save the file with the name just entered, or CANCEL to abort.

If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, the Same name! Overwrite? alert will appear. In this case press OK if its OK to overwrite the original file with the new file, or CANCEL to abort the save operation.

RENAME .....................................................................................................................

If you select RENAME, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to select the file you want to rename, then press the START LCD button to go to the name entry display. Enter a new file name in the same way as described for SAVE, above, then press the OK LCD button to rename the file with the name just entered, or CANCEL to abort. If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, the Same name! Overwrite? alert will appear. In this case press OK if its OK to overwrite the origi- nal file with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the rename operation.

LOAD ..............................................................................................................................

If you select LOAD, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to se- lect the file you want to load, then press the START LCD button. When the Are you sure? prompt appears, press YES to load the file or NO to cancel.

101

The Utility Functions

DELETE .......................................................................................................................

The available formats are compatible with the following Disklavier and Clavinova models:

CVP PERFORMANCE CVP-50/70/55/65/75/83S/85A/87A/89, CLP-705, DOM-30, DOU-10

PIANO FORMAT 1 MX80 series. Disklavier Grand. MX100 MarkII. Disklavier Grand MarkII

PIANO FORMAT 2 MX100A. MX100B.

The converted data will automatically be saved to a free song number and named according to the type of conversion selected:

CVP PERFORMANCE C)XXXXXX where XXXXXX is the original song name.

PIANO FORMAT 1/2 P)XXXXXX where XXXXXX is the original song name.

ZSelect the Conversion Type ...................................................................

Use either of the first two LCD buttons to select the target format of the file: CVP PERFORMANCE, PIANO FORMAT 1, or PIANO FORMAT 2.

If you select DELETE, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to select the file you want to delete, then press the START LCD button. When the Are you sure? prompt appears, press YES to delete the file or NO to cancel.

The original pre-converted data re- mains alive even after the conversion has been executed.

Only 2DD type disks can be used for this operation. If a 2HD disk is used the 2HD disk is not valid! Please copy to 2DD disk. alert display will appear. In this case copy the song you want to convert to a 2DD disk first (see Song Copy below), and then try the conver- sion again.

This function can not be used when the song record mode is engaged the Button not valid! alert display will appear.

Only data on disk recorded by the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S can be con- verted (data in the Clavinovas internal memory cannot be converted until it is saved to disk).

The copied data from the Disk Orches- tra Collection disk (page 103) cannot be converted.

If data converted to PIANO FORMAT 1/2 is played back on the Clavinova, tracks 1 and 2 will not sound.

Record or edit functions cannot be executed on a converted song.

The TRANSFORM function page allows CVP-79A/69/69A/59S performance (i.e. song) data files to be converted to CVP Performance format so that the data can be played on other Clavinova models, or to Yamaha Piano Format 1 or Piano Format 2 so that the data can be played on Yamaha Disklaviers.

Make sure that the disk (only 2dd type disks can be used for this operation) containing the song you want to convert is inserted in the disk drive, and the song record mode is not engaged. Then select the Transform function.

Transform

102

The Utility Functions

XSelect the Song Number to be Converted.............................

Use the SONG LCD button or data dial or [+]/[] buttons to select the song number to be converted.

CStart the Conversion .....................................................................................

Press the TRANSFORM LCD button to begin the conversion process. When the conversion process is finished, the Completed! SONG

No. XX message will appear to inform you as to the SONG No. into which the data was saved.

ZInsert a Disk, Select the Song Copy Function, & Select the Type of Copy Operation ...............................................

Insert the disk containing the song you want to copy, select the Song Copy function, and use either of the first two LCD buttons to select DISK1 1 to copy to a different song within the same disk, or DISK1 2 to copy to a different disk.

XSelect the Source Song Number .....................................................

Use the SONG> LCD button to select the song you want to copy. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the SONG> pa- rameter has been selected. The selected song name will appear in the upper right corner of the display.

CSelect the Destination Song (DISK 1 1 type copy) ..

This step is for the DISK 1 1 type copy only. If you have selected the DISK 1 2 type copy, pass this step and proceed to the next V step.

Use the SONG button to select the song number you wish to copy to (i.e. the destination song number). The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the SONG parameter has been selected. If you select a song number that already contains data, that data will be overwritten by the new song data. If the destination song already contains data, the name of the song file will appear in the middle right corner of the dis- play.

The song copy function cannot be used when the song record mode is engagedthe Button not valid! alert display will appear.

If the Clavinovas internal memory contains song data, the CVP-DISK copy mode will be automatically se- lected to copy the internal memory data to disk (see the Copying Data Recorded Without a Disk below) and the DISK 1 1 or DISK 1 2 copy mode cannot be selected. In this case, copy the internal memory data to disk first, if you want to keep the data, and delete the internal memory data by using the Song Delete function (page 104). Then try the DISK 1 1 or DISK 1 2 copy operation again.

Only song data recorded on the CVP- 79A/69/69A/59S and Disk Orchestra Collection orchestra and rhythm data can be copied using this function.

Data cannot be copied to Disk Orches- tra Collection disks, Disklavier disks, or any write-protected disk.

Song Copy

Song data can be backed up by copying to a new song number or a different disk, as follows: (Make sure that the song record mode is not engaged before proceeding.)

103

The Utility Functions

VStart Copying ........................................................................................................

Press the COPY LCD button to begin the actual copy operation. If you are copying to the same disk the Are you sure? confirmation prompt will appear. Press the OK LCD button to continue, or NO to can- cel.

If you choose to copy to a different disk, the No. of disk ex- changes display will appear to inform you of the number of times the disk will have to be exchanged, because you may have to exchange the source and destination disks a few times if the song being copied is long and complex. Press OK to continue, or CANCEL to abort. If you press OK, the Clavinova will prompt you to insert the source and desti- nation disks as required. Insert the source or destination disk accordingly.

INSERT DISK 1 Insert source disk.

INSERT DISK 2 Insert destination disk.

The first time the destination disk is inserted, the Please select destination song No. display will appear. Use the SONG

LCD buttons, or data dial or [+]/[] buttons, to select the destination song number. If the destination song already contains data, the name of the song file will appear along with the song number, and the data will be overwritten with the new song data. Press OK to execute the copy opera- tion or CANCEL to abort.

While the data is being copied the number of times the disks will have to be exchanged to complete the copy operation will be shown on the display.

Copying Disk Orchestra Disks ([ORCH/3-10TR] and [RHYTHM] parts only) All Disk Orchestra data except the right-hand and left-hand parts can be copied to a separate disk by following the standard DISK 1 2 copy procedure outlined above. The copied data cannot, however, be copied a second time to another disk.

Copying Data Recorded Without a Disk If youve used the Song Record function to record data without first loading a disk: insert a formatted disk, select the Song Copy function, then select the destination song number and copy as described above. The CVP - DISK copy mode will automatically be selected and the CVP will be selected as the source song when the internal memory contains song data.

The DISK 1 1 and DISK 1 2 copy modes cannot be selected when the internal memory contains song data.

Tracks 1 and 2 of a copied DOC song can be recorded, but tracks 3 through 16 cannot be recorded.

The Phrase Repeat function (page 69) cannot be used on a copied DOC song.

The copy operation is not effective if the same song numbers are selected as the Source song and the Destina- tion song in the DISK1 1 type copy. In this case the Button not valid! alert will appear.

104

The Utility Functions

Song Delete

You can delete any song from a loaded disk as follows: (Make sure that the song record mode is not engaged before proceeding.)

Micro Tuning

The Micro Tuning Feature makes it possible to individually tune each key on the Clavinova keyboard in order to match different tuning standards. The pitch of each key can be raised or lowered by a maximum of 100 cents (approximately) from the standard pitch.

ZInsert a Disk & Select the Song Delete Function ...........

Insert the disk containing the song you want to delete and select the Song Delete function.

XSelect the Song to Delete ........................................................................

Use the SONG and buttons to select the song number you wish to delete. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used. It is also possible to delete song data in the internal memory: select CVP in- stead of a song number. (CVP will appear and can be selected only when the internal memory contains data.)

CConfirm & Execute the Delete Operation ...............................

Press the DELETE LCD button Are you sure? will appear on the display. Press the YES LCD button to immediately delete the se- lected song, or the NO LCD button if you wish to cancel the operation.

The song delete function cannot be used when the song record mode is engaged the Button not valid! alert display will appear.

Only song data recorded on the CVP- 79A/69/69A/59S can be deleted using this function.

Data cannot be deleted from write- protected disks.

105

The Utility Functions

ZSelect the Micro Tuning Function...................................................

XSelect a Key ............................................................................................................

Select the key you want to tune by pressing the key on the keyboard. The selected key will appear on the display.

CTune .................................................................................................................................

Use the TUNE s and t buttons to tune the selected key as required. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used. You can play the key being tuned to check the sound during this operation. The maximum tuning range is 100 cents (100 cents = one semitone). The normal tun- ing (0cent) for the selected key can be instantly recalled by simultane- ously pressing the TUNE s and t buttons.

VRepeat as Necessary ....................................................................................

Repeat steps 2 and 3 until all the required keys have been tuned.

The Micro-Tuning settings are retained in memory even when the power is turned off if the BACKUP page TUNE/ MICRO TUNING parameter is turned ON (page 107), otherwise all keys are set to 0.

Disk Operations: Saving, Loading, Renaming, and Deleting Micro-tuning Files ..................................................

Make sure that the disk you want to use for this operation is inserted in the disk drive, and both the song record or playback modes are not engaged before proceeding.

ZSelect a File Operation ...............................................................................

Use the fourth LCD button to select the LOAD, SAVE, DELETE, or RENAME operation.

XPress START ............................................................................................................

Press the START LCD button to begin the selected operation, then proceed according to the selected operation as described below:

The Micro Tuning Disk Operations cannot be used when the song record or playback mode is engaged the Button not valid! alert will be dis- played.

106

The Utility Functions

SAVE ...............................................................................................................................

If you select SAVE the name entry display will appear and you will have to enter a name for the file to be saved.

An empty name appears in the upper right corner of the display. Use the > LCD button to position the underline cursor where you want to enter a character (file names can be up to 12 characters in length). Use the data dial and/or the [+]/[] buttons to select the character you want to enter from the list in the center of the display, then press the c.set LCD button to enter the character at the current cursor position. Repeat this procedure until your name is complete. The c.del LCD button can be used to back up one space and delete a character.

When the name is complete press the SAVE LCD button to save the file with the name just entered, or CANCEL to abort.

If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, the Same name! Overwrite? alert will appear. In this case press OK if its OK to overwrite the original file with the new file, or CANCEL to abort the save operation.

RENAME .....................................................................................................................

If you select RENAME, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to select the file you want to rename, then press the START LCD button to go to the name entry display. Enter a new file name in the same way as described for SAVE, above, then press the OK LCD button to rename the file with the name just entered, or CANCEL to abort. If you enter a name that already exists on the disk, the Same name! Overwrite? alert will appear. In this case press OK if its OK to overwrite the origi- nal file with the renamed file, or CANCEL to abort the rename operation.

107

The Utility Functions

LOAD ..............................................................................................................................

Backup

This function allows backup of various parameter settings to be turned on or off as required. To turn backup for a parameter group on or off first use the and LCD buttons, data dial, or [+]/[] buttons to select the parameter group (see list below), and then use the ON/OFF LCD button to turn the selected pa- rameter group on or off. An asterisk (*) appears before the name of a parameter group when backup is turned on.

DELETE .......................................................................................................................

If you select LOAD, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to se- lect the file you want to load, then press the START LCD button. When the Are you sure? prompt appears, press YES to load the file or NO to cancel.

If you select DELETE, first use the FILE and LCD buttons to select the file you want to delete, then press the START LCD button. When the Are you sure? prompt appears, press YES to delete the file or NO to cancel.

108

The Utility Functions

The default settings for the BACKUP function are ABC MODE, REGISTRA- TION, and POPUP & ALERT ON, the other parameter groups OFF.

The LCD contrast, help language and this backup on/off setting itself are always backed up.

Recall

This function can be used to recall the initial factory settings for a range of parameters individually or all at once.

To recall a parameter group first use the and LCD buttons, data dial, or [+]/[] buttons to select the parameter group (see list below), and then press the START LCD button. When the Are you sure? confirmation prompt appears, press YES to recall or NO to cancel.

VOICE SETTING STYLE SETTING SONG SETTING REGISTRATION MIDI ALL SETUP

* See page 122 for the list of parameters contained in each parameter group.

The initial LCD contrast, help language and the above backup on/off settings are not recalled by this function. These and all other settings can be reset to the initial factory values by turning the power on while holding the C7 key. When this is done the Back up data erased and replaced by Factory data. message will appear for a few sec- onds.

VOICE SETTING TUNE/MICRO TUNING PEDAL MIDI STYLE SETTING ABC MODE SONG SETTING REGISTRATION POPUP & ALERT

* See page 122 for the list of parameters contained in each parameter group.

Parameters that are backed up will be retained in memory for about a week if the Clavinova is not turned on during this time. All parameters will be reset to their default values if the power remains off for longer than about a week. To ensure that your backed-up settings are main- tained, turn the power on for a few minutes at least once a week.

109

The Utility Functions

Popup Time

Sets the amount of time the pop-up displays remain on the display screen before disappearing. The pop- up time of the voice/style displays can be set independently from all other pop-up displays.

Use the VOICE/STYLE or OTHERS [] and [] LCD buttons to set the pop-up time between 1 and 20 seconds as required. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the desired parameter has been selected. The default pop-up time (8 seconds) for either parameter can be recalled by pressing the corresponding and LCD buttons simultaneously.

Song List Priority

This function determines whether a GM (general MIDI)/SMF or DOC (Disk Orchestra Collection) file will take priority and be used for playback when encountered on the same disk. Use the corresponding LCD button to select GM or DOC (default) as required.

Alert Sound

This function allows you to select one of six Alert Voices which will sound when an error is encoun- tered, and set the alert volume.

Use the VOICE and LCD buttons to select the alert voice. The data dial and [+]/[] buttons can also be used once the VOICE parameter is selected. Press the VOLUME LCD button to select the volume parameter and use the data dial or [+]/[] buttons to set the volume as required. The volume range is from 0 (no alert sound) to 100 (maximum volume). The default volume level (50) can be recalled in- stantly by pressing the [+] and [] buttons simultaneously while the VOLUME parameter is selected.

The default alert voice is Steel Drums, and the alert voice will sound automatically when you change the alert voice.

110

Messages

When a disk related function button is pressed (ex. [PLAY]) and there is no disk in the disk drive this prompt will appear. Put the proper disk in the drive and redo the proce- dure.

When renaming or copying the original song data this prompt will alert you in the event that there is no song data in the selected song number, or in the disk. Re-select a data-containing song, or put a disk with song data into the floppy disk drive.

This alert appears if there is no Registration Memory, Micro Tuning, or related data other than song data on the currently inserted disk when you attempt a file-related operation. Insert a disk with the proper data and do the procedure again.

This message appears when a new disk or a non Clavinova Formatted disk has been put into the disk drive. Press OK if you want to format the disk. Press CANCEL if you want to abort the formatting process.

The current disk is write protected and cannot be written to. Insert a disk that is not write protected and try the procedure again.

You have attempted to edit or record over a song that was made on another system (i.e. computer sequencer, etc.). Song data made on other systems cannot be edited or recorded over. You can however, edit or record over any song that you have recorded yourself on the CVP-79A/69/69A/59S.

A button that does not have a function in the current mode has been pressed. (ex. the [GUIDE] button has been pressed when the Song Play mode is not engaged.)

The disk drive heads are dirty and should be cleaned. Clean the heads with a commer- cially-available floppy disk head cleaner.

An error occurred while writing to or reading from the disk. Try the operation again; if the error occurs a second time the disk or drive may be faulty. If the drive has been used for some time the heads may be dirty. Clean the heads with a commercially- available floppy disk head cleaner. If the error still occurs with one disk and not others the disk should be considered faulty and discarded. If the error occurs with all disks the drive may be at fault. Refer the problem to your Yamaha dealer.

The disk operation (formatting, etc.) or data procedure is finished.

The disk is currently being accessed and must not be ejected from the drive.

When an operation such as DELETE is selected, this prompt will confirm that you want to go ahead with the operation. Press YES to continue or NO to abort the operation.

The currently loaded disk is full and cannot hold anymore data. Delete any unneces- sary data in the current disk, use a disk that has more available space or use a new disk. If this appears during song recording (in this case OK doesnt appear), recording will stop and recorded data up to that point will be saved automatically.

A single disk can only hold up to 60 files for each data type (song, style, registration, etc.). If this message appears, insert a new disk or delete any unnecessary files in the current disk. (Style Files cannot be deleted from the disk.)

111

Messages

A file with the same name exists. Press OK if it is OK to overwrite the original file with new data or press CANCEL to abort the operation.

Informs you of the number of times the disks must be exchanged when copying a song to a different disk before the song copy operation starts.

When copying a song from the source disk to another disk, this message will ask you to specify the song number to which the song is to be copied in the destination disk when it is first inserted.

Insert the source disk to be copied in the song copy to a different disk operation.

Insert the destination disk to be copied to in the song copy to a different disk opera- tion.

If the [EXIT] button is pressed prior to storing the recorded data in the CHORD SE- QUENCE function this confirmation prompt will appear.

In the Song Recording INITIAL EDIT mode, if the [EXIT] button is pressed prior to writing the edited data, this confirmation prompt will appear.

Only 2DD floppy disks can be used when converting data to the CVP Performance format or Piano format. If a 2HD disk is used this alert will appear.

After the song data has been converted to CVP Performance format or Piano Format this message will inform you as to the SONG No. into which the data was saved.

This message appears when the CUSTOM STYLE mode is engaged.

When you attempt to change the beat in the CUSTOM STYLE mode this confirmation prompt will appear.

When you attempt to change the number of measures in the CUSTOM STYLE mode this confirmation prompt will appear.

When the source style is a preset style or a style loaded from the optional Style File disk, if you are recording new parts in the CUSTOM STYLE mode prior to clearing data from parts other than R1 and R2, this confirmation prompt will appear.

When the STORE LCD button is pressed in the CUSTOM STYLE mode or when a new source style is selected prior to storing the current style data this confirmation prompt will appear.

112

Messages

When the [EXIT] button is pressed in the CUSTOM STYLE mode prior to storing the current style data this confirmation prompt will appear.

If the CUSTOM STYLE modes RECALL SECTION operation cannot be carried out, because the time signature has been changed, this alert will appear.

If the data has not been stored in memory before saving to disk in the CUSTOM STYLE mode, this will prompt you to store the data before proceeding.

If there is not enough memory to store the data in the CUSTOM STYLE store opera- tion, this alert will be displayed. It will be necessary to delete a style or simplify the current style before storing the new style.

Appears when DELETE is selected in the previous message.

The memory has become full during recording or editing in the CUSTOM STYLE mode. It will be necessary to simplify the style. If this appears during song recording (in this case OK doesnt appear), recording will stop and recorded data up to that point will be saved automatically.

Some Style Files are too large for the LISTEN function to handle in the STYLE FILE LOAD mode. In this case the data must be loaded into the internal memory in order to be played.

When you attempt to LOAD a Style File and there is not enough memory to hold the specified file this alert will be displayed. It will be necessary to delete a style before loading the new style.

As long as the Clavinova is regularly used, data is retained in memory. This message will appear if the power has not been turned on for quite some time (approximately one week). In this case all data will be initialized to the factory-preset values. This message also appears when you intentionally recall all the factory data by turning the power on while holding the C7 key (see note on page 108).

A problem has been detected in the hardware system during power up. Refer the prob- lem to your Yamaha dealer.

113

The Connectors

AUX IN L/L+R and R Jacks ........................................................................................

The input signal from the AUX IN jacks is delivered to the AUX OUT jacks, but is not affected by the Clavinovas volume control or reverb effect.

These jacks are intended primarily for use with external synthesizers or tone generator modules.

For example, the outputs of the synthesizer/tone generator can be to the Clavinova AUX IN jacks, al- lowing the sound of the synthesizer/tone generator to be reproduced via the Clavinovas internal amplifier and speaker system. For monaural signal input (when the connected device is monaural), use only the L/ L+R jack.

Although the Clavinova is a self-contained musical instrument that simply be plugged into the AC mains outlet and played, it also features a number of connectors for system expansion.

Tone Generator

AUX IN L/L+RR

AUX OUT L/L+R and R Jacks..................................................................................

The AUX OUT jack signal must never be returned to the AUX IN jacks, either directly or through external equipment.

The AUX OUT L/L+R and R jacks deliver the output of the Clavinova for connection to an instru- ment amplifier, mixing console, PA system, or record- ing equipment. If you will be connecting the Clavinova to a monaural sound system, use only the L/L+R jack. When a plug is inserted into the L/L+R jack only, the left- and right-channel signals are com- bined and delivered via the L/L+R jack so you dont lose any of the Clavinovas sound.

MIDI IN, THRU and OUT Connectors (MIDI IN and OUT on the CVP-59S)...................................................................

The MIDI IN connector receives MIDI data from an external MIDI device (such as a synthesizer, se- quencer, music computer, etc.) which can be used to control the Clavinova. The MIDI THRU connector provided on the CVP-79A, 69, and 69A re-transmits any data received at the MIDI IN connector, allowing chaining of several MIDI instruments or other de- vices. The MIDI OUT connector transmits MIDI data generated by the Clavinova (e.g. note and velocity data produced by playing the Clavinova keyboard).

CVP-79A/69/69A

THRUIN

MIDI OUT

MIDI Sequencer Tone Generator

Stereo System

AUX OUT L/L+RR

An optional Yamaha FC7 Foot Controller can be plugged into this jack for foot volume (expression) control of the keyboard sound only (i.e. expression doesnt affect the auto-accompaniment sound or disk playback). Press the pedal forward to increase volume, and backward to decrease volume.

EXP PEDAL Jack (CVP-79A) ....................................................................................

EXP PEDAL

114

Troubleshooting

If you encounter what appears to be a malfunction, please check the following points before assuming that your Clavinova is faulty.

Options

BC-8 Bench A stable, comfortable bench styled to match your Yamaha Clavinova.

HPE-160 Stereo Headphones High-performance lightweight dynamic headphones with extra-soft ear pads.

KC-883 Key Cover for the CVP-59S A convenient way to keep your keyboard clean and dust-free.

Some items may not be available in certain areas.

1. No Sound When the Power is Turned On Is the AC plug properly connected to the Clavinova and an AC wall outlet? Check the AC connection carefully. Is the MASTER VOLUME control turned up to a reasonable listening level?

2. No Rhythm, ABC, or Song Playback Sound Check the ABC/SONG VOLUME control setting. No sound is produced if it is set to the minimum posi- tion.

3. The Clavinova Reproduces Radio or TV Sound This can occur if there is a high-power transmitter in your vicinity. Contact your Yamaha dealer.

4. Intermittent Static Noise This is usually due to turning on or off a household appliance or other electronic equipment which is fed by the same AC mains line as your Clavinova.

5. Interference Appears On Radio or TV Sets Located Near the Clavinova The Clavinova contains digital circuitry which can generate radio-frequency noise. The solution is to move the Clavinova further away from the affected equipment, or vice versa.

6. Distorted Sound When the Clavinova is Connected to An External Amplifier/Speaker System If the Clavinova is connected to a stereo system or instrument amplifier and the sound is distorted, reduce the setting of the Clavinova volume control to a level at which the distortion ceases.

115

Index

A A-B repeat ............................................. 70 ABC freeze ............................................ 60 Accompaniment ..................................... 28 Alert & error displays, custom style ....... 53 Alert sound .......................................... 109 All delete, chord sequence .................... 82 Auto Bass Chord ................................... 34 Aux in jacks ......................................... 113 Aux out jacks ....................................... 113

B Backup ................................................. 107 Backup parameter list .......................... 122 Bank, registration ................................... 59 Beat display ........................................... 31 Beat, custom style ................................. 46 Break, left pedal ..................................... 32

C Center pedal .......................................... 26 Check play, chord sequence ................. 82 Chord assist ........................................... 40 Chord sequence recording .................... 80 Clock ...................................................... 95 Connectors .......................................... 113 Contrast button ...................................... 11 Control change ...................................... 96 Custom style .......................................... 45 Custom style playback ........................... 52 CVP-59S assembly ............................. 150 CVP-69/69A assembly ........................ 142 CVP-79A assembly ............................. 136

D Damper mode (CVP-79A) ..................... 94 Damper pedal ........................................ 26 Damper range ........................................ 93 Delete, chord sequence ....................... 101 Delete, registration file ........................... 82 Demo tunes ........................................... 14 Demonstration Playback ........................ 13 Detune depth ......................................... 18 Disk orchestra collection playback ........ 61 Disk styles, loading ................................ 55 Disk, custom style .................................. 52 Display ..................................................... 8 Display hold button .................................. 9 Drum/key assignment list .................... 121 Dual mode ............................................. 17

E Effect depth ........................................... 25 Effect type list ........................................ 24 Effects, custom style .............................. 51 End mark, chord sequence .................... 82 End, chord sequence ............................. 82 Exit button .............................................. 10 Expression Pedal ..................................... 7 Expression pedal jack .......................... 113

F Fast forward ........................................... 70 Fill-ins .................................................... 32 Fingered accompaniment ...................... 36 Fingering chart ..................................... 123 Floppy Disk Handling ............................... 2 Format, disk ........................................... 98 Full keyboard accompaniment ............... 37

G Guide modes ......................................... 67

H Harmony ................................................ 41 Headphones ............................................ 3 Help function .......................................... 11

I Initial edit ............................................... 85 Introduction ............................................ 30

K Key Cover ................................................ 3 Keyboard percussion ............................. 16 Keyboard utilities ................................... 91

L LCD buttons ............................................. 8 Left pedal function ................................. 93 Left pedal ............................................... 27 Left pedal, harmony ............................... 43 Load, registration file ........................... 100 Local control .......................................... 95

M Memory backup ..................................... 12 Messages ............................................ 110 Metronome ............................................ 33 Micro tuning ......................................... 104 Micro tuning disk operations ................ 105 MIDI 1 utilities ........................................ 94 MIDI 2 utilities ........................................ 95 MIDI 3 utilities ........................................ 97 MIDI connectors .................................. 113 MIDI data format .................................. 124 MIDI implementation chart ................... 156 MIDI reception ....................................... 94 Mixer button ........................................... 10 Multi-track recording & playback ........... 75 Music data, playing other types ............. 71 Music Stand ............................................. 3 Mute ....................................................... 64

N Name, custom style ............................... 49

O Octave shift ............................................ 91 One touch setting .................................. 44 Options ................................................ 114

P Page buttons ......................................... 10 Pan ........................................................ 92 Panel controls .......................................... 4 Part assignment ..................................... 65 Part depth, reverb .................................. 23 Part selection ......................................... 63 Pause .................................................... 70 Pedal utilities ......................................... 92 Phrase repeat ........................................ 69 Playback start/stop ................................ 62 Polyphony .............................................. 16 Popup time .......................................... 109 Power Switch ........................................... 3 Precautions .............................................. 2 Preset recall, effect ................................ 25 Program change .................................... 96 Punch-in modes ..................................... 79 Punch-in/out recording .......................... 78

Q Quantize, custom style .......................... 48 Quantize, track ...................................... 84 Quick recording ..................................... 72

R Recall ................................................... 108 Recall section, custom style .................. 50 Recording without a disk ....................... 89 Recording, song .................................... 72 Registration memory .............................. 58 Registration recall .................................. 60 Registration, disk ................................... 99 Rename, registration file ...................... 100 Renaming song files .............................. 87 Repeat ................................................... 69

Reverb type ........................................... 22 Rewind ................................................... 70 Rhythm ON/OFF, chord sequence ........ 82 Right pedal ............................................ 26 Root, chord ............................................ 80

S Second voice ......................................... 17 Send ...................................................... 97 Send channel ......................................... 94 Single finger accompaniment ................ 35 Small ABC ............................................. 39 Song copy ............................................ 102 Song delete ......................................... 104 Song list priority ................................... 109 Song number selection .................... 62, 73 Song playback ................................. 61, 89 Song recording ...................................... 72 Song repeat ........................................... 69 Sostenuto pedal ..................................... 26 Sound utilities ........................................ 92 Split mode .............................................. 19 Split point ............................................... 21 Split point, ABC ..................................... 39 Split voices ............................................ 19 Start, straight ......................................... 30 Start, synchronized ................................ 31 Start, tap ................................................ 31 Start/stop, MIDI ...................................... 96 Stop ....................................................... 32 Store, custom style ................................ 50 Style clear .............................................. 51 Style file load ......................................... 55 Style list ............................................... 120 Style selection ....................................... 28

T Tempo control ........................................ 29 Time signature, custom style ................. 46 Total depth, reverb ................................ 23 Touch sensitivity .................................... 91 Track delete ........................................... 84 Track mix ............................................... 83 Track modes .................................... 73, 75 Track quantize ....................................... 84 Tracks, adding new ............................... 77 Transform ............................................ 101 Transpose .............................................. 91 Transpose, MIDI .................................... 97 Troubleshooting ................................... 114 Tune ...................................................... 92 Type, chord ............................................ 80

U Utility function selection ......................... 90

V Voice balance, dual mode ..................... 18 Voice balance, split mode ...................... 20 Voice effects .......................................... 24 Voice list .............................................. 116 Voice selection ...................................... 15 Voice selection, song ............................. 66 Volume, ABC/Song ............................ 6, 37 Volume, custom style ............................ 51 Volume, master ....................................... 6 Volume, other .......................................... 7 Volume, part .......................................... 38 Volume, song ......................................... 65 Volume, song part ................................. 66

116

Voice List / Stimmenverzeichnis / Liste des voix /

Bank Element Group Program CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Pan Usable

MSB LSB Number CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Range

Piano 0 112 1 Grand Piano1 Grand Piano1 Grand Piano1 c 2 (S) 2 2 A-1~C7

0 113 1 Grand Piano2 Grand Piano2 Grand Piano2 k 1 1 1 A-1~C7

0 112 2 BrightPiano BrightPiano BrightPiano c 2 (S) 2 2 A-1~C7

0 0 2 Rock Piano Rock Piano Rock Piano c 1 1 1 A-1~C7

0 114 1 Mellow Piano Mellow Piano Mellow Piano c 2 (S) 1 1 A-1~C7

0 116 3 Elec.Grand k 2 A-1~C7

0 115 3 Piano EP 1 Piano EP 1 Piano EP 1 k 2 2 2 A-1~C7

0 0 3 Piano EP 2 Piano EP 2 Piano EP 2 c 2 2 2 A-1~C7

0 0 4 Honky Tonk Honky Tonk Honky Tonk c 2 2 2 A-1~C7

E.Piano 0 0 5 Elec.Piano Elec.Piano Elec.Piano c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 112 5 EP Jazz EP Jazz EP Jazz k 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 116 5 Bell EP Bell EP Bell EP k 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 6 DX EP Pop DX EP Pop DX EP Pop c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 115 6 DX EP Modern DX EP Modern DX EP Modern k 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 116 6 Mallet EP Mallet EP Mallet EP k 2 1 1 C1~C6

0 117 6 Crystal EP Crystal EP Crystal EP c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 117 5 Stage EP k 2 C1~C6

Harpsichord 0 112 7 Harpsichord1 Harpsichord1 Harpsichord1 k 1 1 2 C1~C6

0 113 7 Harpsichord2 Harpsichord2 Harpsichord2 k 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 115 7 Grand Harpsi Grand Harpsi Grand Harpsi k 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 116 7 Harpsi Pop k 2 C1~C6

0 0 8 Clavi Clavi Clavi c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 47 Harp Harp Harp c 1 1 1 C1~C6

Vibes 0 112 12 Vibes Vibes Vibes k 2 2 2 F2~F5

0 0 12 Jazz Vibes c 1 F2~F5

0 0 9 Celesta Celesta Celesta c 1 1 1 C3~C7

0 112 9 Celesta 4ft Celesta 4ft Celesta 4ft k 1 1 1 C2~C6

0 0 10 Glockenspiel Glockenspiel Glockenspiel c 1 1 1 C4~C7

0 0 11 Music Box Music Box Music Box c 2 2 2 C3~C5

0 112 13 Marimba Marimba Marimba k 1 1 1 C2~C6

0 0 14 Xylophone Xylophone Xylophone c 1 1 1 F3~C6

0 0 15 TubularBells TubularBells TubularBells c 1 1 1 C3~F4

0 0 16 Dulcimer Dulcimer Dulcimer c 2 2 2 C3~C5

Guitar 0 112 25 Gut Guitar Gut Guitar Gut Guitar k 1 1 1 E1~C5

0 0 25 Nylon Guitar Nylon Guitar Nylon Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~C5

0 0 26 Steel Guitar Steel Guitar Steel Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~C5

0 112 26 Folk Guitar k 1 E1~C5

0 115 26 12Str Guitar c 2 E1~C5

0 112 27 J.Gtr Mellow J.Gtr Mellow J.Gtr Mellow k 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 0 27 Jazz Guitar Jazz Guitar Jazz Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 113 27 J.Gtr Hard k 1 E1~D5

0 0 28 Rock Guitar1 Rock Guitar Rock Guitar c 2 2 2 E1~D5

0 113 28 Rock Guitar2 k 1 E1~D5

0 112 29 Mute Guitar k 1 E1~D5

0 0 29 Pick Guitar Pick Guitar Pick Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 0 30 Ovrdr.Guitar Ovrdr.Guitar Ovrdr.Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 0 31 Dist.Guitar Dist.Guitar Dist.Guitar c 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 0 32 GuitarHarmo. GuitarHarmo. GuitarHarmo. c 1 1 1 E1~D5

0 0 105 Sitar Sitar Sitar c 1 1 1 C2~F4

0 0 106 Banjo Banjo Banjo c 1 1 1 C2~C5

0 0 107 Shamisen Shamisen Shamisen c 1 1 1 D2~G4

0 0 108 Koto Koto Koto c 1 1 1 G2~C5

0 0 109 Kalimba Kalimba Kalimba c 1 1 1 C2~G4

117

Lista de voces

Bank Element Group Program CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Pan Usable

MSB LSB Number CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Range

Clavi. tone/ 0 112 89 Clavinova T. Clavinova T. Clavinova T. k 2 1 1 C1~C7

synth 0 0 89 New Age Pad1 New Age Pad1 New Age Pad1 c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 115 89 New Age Pad2 New Age Pad2 New Age Pad2 c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 90 Warm Pad Warm Pad Warm Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 91 PolySynthPad PolySynthPad PolySynthPad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 92 Choir Pad Choir Pad Choir Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 93 Bowed Pad Bowed Pad Bowed Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 94 Metallic Pad Metallic Pad Metallic Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 95 Halo Pad Halo Pad Halo Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 96 Sweep Pad Sweep Pad Sweep Pad c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 112 102 Cosmic Pad Cosmic Pad Cosmic Pad k 2 2 2 G0~C6

0 112 93 Ice Pad Ice Pad Ice Pad k 2 2 2 G0~C6

0 112 95 Techno Pad Techno Pad Techno Pad k 2 2 2 G0~C6

0 112 97 SynthCrystal SynthCrystal SynthCrystal k 2 2 2 C2~C6

0 0 97 Rain Rain Rain c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 98 SoundTrack SoundTrack SoundTrack c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 99 Crystal Crystal Crystal c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 100 Atmosphere Atmosphere Atmosphere c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 101 Brightness Brightness Brightness c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 102 Goblins Goblins Goblins c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 103 Echoes Echoes Echoes c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 104 Sci-Fi Sci-Fi Sci-Fi c 2 2 2 C1~C6

Organ 0 0 20 Pipe Organ Pipe Organ Pipe Organ c 2 (S) 2 (S) 2 (S) C0~C6

0 115 20 Chapel Organ Chapel Organ Chapel Organ k 2 1 1 C1~C6

0 115 17 Draw 16 Organ Draw 16 Organ Draw 16 Organ c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 17 Draw 8 Organ Draw 8 Organ Draw 8 Organ c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 18 Perc. Organ Perc. Organ Perc. Organ c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 19 Rock Organ Rock Organ Rock Organ c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 112 19 Trem.Organ 1 k 1 C1~C6

0 115 19 Trem.Organ 2 c 2 C1~C6

0 0 21 Reed Organ Reed Organ Reed Organ c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 22 French Accrd French Accrd French Accrd c 2 2 2 F2~A5

0 115 22 Accordion Accordion Accordion c 2 2 2 F2~A5

0 0 24 Tango Accrd. Tango Accrd. Tango Accrd. c 1 1 1 F2~F5

0 0 23 Harmonica Harmonica Harmonica c 1 1 1 C3~C5

Strings / 0 115 49 Orch.Strings Orch.Strings Orch.Strings c 2 2 2 C0~C6

Choir 0 0 49 Strings Strings Strings k 1 1 1 C0~C6

0 0 50 Strings Slow Strings Slow Strings Slow k 1 1 1 C0~C6

0 112 49 Strings Soft Strings Soft Strings Soft k 1 1 1 C0~C6

0 113 49 Chamber Str Chamber Str Chamber Str k 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 51 Syn.Strings1 Syn.Strings1 Syn.Strings1 c 2 2 2 C0~C6

0 0 52 Syn.Strings2 Syn.Strings2 Syn.Strings2 c 2 2 2 C0~C6

0 115 53 Choir Choir Choir c 2 2 2 E1~E5

0 112 53 Chapel Choir Chapel Choir Chapel Choir k 1 1 1 E1~E5

0 0 53 Synth Choir Synth Choir Synth Choir c 2 2 2 E1~E5

0 0 54 Voice Oohs Voice Oohs Voice Oohs c 1 1 1 C2~G4

0 0 55 Synth Voice Synth Voice Synth Voice c 1 1 1 C2~C5

0 112 41 Violin 1 k 1 G2~C6

0 0 41 Violin 2 Violin Violin c 1 1 1 G2~C6

0 0 42 Viola Viola Viola c 1 1 1 C2~E5

0 0 43 Cello Cello Cello c 1 1 1 C1~E4

0 0 44 Contrabass Contrabass Contrabass c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 0 111 Fiddle Fiddle Fiddle c 1 1 1 G2~C6

0 0 45 Trem.Strings Trem.Strings Trem.Strings c 2 2 2 E0~C6

0 0 46 Pizzicato Pizzicato Pizzicato c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 56 OrchestraHit OrchestraHit OrchestraHit c 1 1 1 C2~C4

118

Bank Element Group Program CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Pan Usable

MSB LSB Number CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Range

Brass 0 115 62 BigBnd Brass c 2 C1~C6

0 112 62 Brass Sect.1 Brass Sect.1 Brass Sect.1 k 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 62 Brass Sect.2 Brass Sect.2 Brass Sect.2 c 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 113 62 Pop Brass Pop Brass Pop Brass k 1 1 1 C1~C6

0 0 63 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass1 c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 64 Synth Brass2 Synth Brass2 Synth Brass2 c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 112 63 Analog Brass k 1 C1~C6

0 0 57 Trumpet Trumpet Trumpet c 1 1 1 A#2~A#5

0 0 58 Trombone Trombone Trombone c 1 1 1 A#0~D#4

0 0 59 Tuba Tuba Tuba c 1 1 1 F0~G2

0 0 60 MuteTrumpet1 MuteTrumpet1 MuteTrumpet1 c 1 1 1 A#2~A#4

0 112 60 MuteTrumpet2 MuteTrumpet2 MuteTrumpet2 k 1 1 1 F#2~A5

0 0 61 French Horn French Horn French Horn c 1 1 1 F1~F4

Sax / Flute 0 115 67 Breath Sax Breath Sax Breath Sax c 2 2 2 F#1~D#4

0 0 66 Alto Sax Alto Sax Alto Sax c 1 1 1 C#2~G#4

0 0 65 Soprano Sax Soprano Sax Soprano Sax c 1 1 1 F#2~D#5

0 0 67 Tenor Sax Tenor Sax Tenor Sax c 1 1 1 F#1~D#4

0 0 68 Baritone Sax Baritone Sax Baritone Sax c 1 1 1 C#1~G#3

0 112 69 Oboe 1 k 1 A#2~G5

0 0 69 Oboe 2 Oboe Oboe c 1 1 1 A#2~G5

0 0 70 English Horn English Horn English Horn c 1 1 1 E2~A#4

0 0 71 Bassoon Bassoon Bassoon c 1 1 1 A#0~F4

0 112 72 Clarinet 1 k 1 D2~G5

0 0 72 Clarinet 2 Clarinet Clarinet c 1 1 1 D2~G5

0 0 73 Piccolo Piccolo Piccolo c 1 1 1 D4~C7

0 112 74 Flute 1 k 1 G2~F#6

0 0 74 Flute 2 Flute Flute c 1 1 1 C3~C6

0 0 75 Recorder Recorder Recorder c 1 1 1 C3~C6

0 0 76 Pan Flute Pan Flute Pan Flute c 1 1 1 C3~C6

0 0 77 Blown Bottle Blown Bottle Blown Bottle c 2 2 2 C3~C6

0 0 78 Shakuhachi Shakuhachi Shakuhachi c 1 1 1 G2~C5

0 0 79 Whistle Whistle Whistle c 1 1 1 C3~C6

0 0 80 Ocarina Ocarina Ocarina c 1 1 1 C3~C5

0 0 110 Bagpipe Bagpipe Bagpipe c 2 2 2 C1~F4

0 0 112 Shanai Shanai Shanai c 2 2 2 C2~C4

0 0 81 Square Lead Square Lead Square Lead c 2 2 2 A-1~C7

0 0 82 Saw. Lead Saw. Lead Saw. Lead c 2 2 2 A-1~C7

0 0 83 CalliopeLead CalliopeLead CalliopeLead c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 84 Chiff Lead Chiff Lead Chiff Lead c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 85 Charang Lead Charang Lead Charang Lead c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 86 Voice Lead Voice Lead Voice Lead c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 87 Fifths Lead Fifths Lead Fifths Lead c 2 2 2 C1~C6

0 0 88 Bass & Lead Bass & Lead Bass & Lead c 2 2 2 A-1~C7

0 112 83 Synth Wood Synth Wood Synth Wood k 2 2 2 C2~C6

Voice List / Stimmenverzeichnis / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

119

Bank Element Group Program CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Pan Usable

MSB LSB Number CVP-79A CVP-69/69A CVP-59S Range

Bass 0 112 33 Acous.Bass 1 Acous.Bass 1 Acous.Bass 1 k 1 1 1 C0~F#3

0 0 33 Acous.Bass 2 Acous.Bass 2 Acous.Bass 2 c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 115 33 Acous.Bass 3 Acous.Bass 3 Acous.Bass 3 k 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 112 34 E.Bass Slap E.Bass Slap E.Bass Slap k 2 2 2 E0~G2

0 0 34 Finger Bass Finger Bass Finger Bass c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 113 34 Elec.Bass k 1 E0~G2

0 114 34 Heavy Bass k 1 E0~G2

0 0 35 Picked Bass Picked Bass Picked Bass c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 0 36 Fretless Fretless Fretless c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 0 37 Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 1 c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 0 38 Slap Bass 2 Slap Bass 2 Slap Bass 2 c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 115 37 Hammer Bass k 1 E0~G2

0 0 39 Analog Bass Analog Bass Analog Bass c 1 1 1 E0~G2

0 0 40 Synth Bass Synth Bass Synth Bass c 1 1 1 E0~G2

Drums/Perc. 127 0 1 Standard Kit Standard Kit Standard Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 9 Room Kit Room Kit Room Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 17 Rock Kit Rock Kit Rock Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 25 Electro kit Electro kit Electro kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 26 Analog Kit Analog Kit Analog Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 33 Jazz Kit Jazz Kit Jazz Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 41 Brush Kit Brush Kit Brush Kit d 1 1 1 *

127 0 49 Classic Kit Classic Kit Classic Kit d 1 1 1 *

0 0 48 Timpani Timpani Timpani c 1 1 1 E0~C2

0 0 113 Tinkle Bell Tinkle Bell Tinkle Bell c 2 2 2 C3~C5

0 0 114 Agogo Agogo Agogo c 1 1 1 C2~C5

0 0 115 Steel Drums Steel Drums Steel Drums c 1 1 1 C2~C5

0 0 116 Woodblock Woodblock Woodblock c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 117 Taiko Drum Taiko Drum Taiko Drum c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 118 Melodic Tom Melodic Tom Melodic Tom c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 119 Synth Drum Synth Drum Synth Drum c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 120 Reverse Cym. Reverse Cym. Reverse Cym. c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 121 Fret Noise Fret Noise Fret Noise c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 122 Breath Noise Breath Noise Breath Noise c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 123 Seashore Seashore Seashore c 2 2 2 C3~C4

0 0 124 Bird Tweet Bird Tweet Bird Tweet c 2 2 2 C3~C4

0 0 125 Telephone Telephone Telephone c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 128 Gunshot Gunshot Gunshot c 1 1 1 C3~C4

0 0 126 Helicopter Helicopter Helicopter c 2 2 2 C3~C4

0 0 127 Applause Applause Applause c 2 2 2 C3~C4

Voice List / Stimmenverzeichnis / Liste des voix / Lista de voces

Bank LSB: 0 refers to GM system level 1 voice allocation. (Some GM voices not listed above are not selectable on the panel but sound when the corresponding program numbers are received.)

Pan: c=Center, k=Keyboard Scaling Pan, d=Drum Kit Pan. Element: (S)=Stereo voice.

Bank LSB : 0 concerne lassignation de voix GM System Level 1. (Certaines voix GM ne sont pas indiques dans la liste ci-dessus et ne peuvent pas tre slectionnes au moyen des touches du panneau, mais leur son est malgr tout produit la rception de leur numro de programme.)

Pan : c = Centre, k = Panoramique dchelle du clavier, d = Panoramique de kit de batterie.

Element : (S) = Voix stro

Bank LSB: 0 se refiere a la asignacin de voces de nivel 1 del sistema GM (algunas voces GM que no se enumeran arriba no pueden seleccionarse en el panel, pero suenan cuando se reciben los nmeros de programa correspondientes.)

Pan: c = central, k = efecto panormico graduado del teclado, d = efecto panormico de juego de batera.

Element: (S) = voz estereofnica.

Bank LSB: 0 entspricht der Stimmenzuordnung GM System Level 1. (Manche der oben aufgefhrten GM-Stimmen sind nicht ber das Bedienfeld whlbar, knnen jedoch per MIDI- Programmwechsel gespielt werden.)

Pan: c = Mitte, k = tastenskalierte Verschiebung, d = Schlagzeug- Anordnung

Element: (S) = Stereo-Stimme

* Refer to the Drum/key Assignment List on page 121. * Siehe Verzeichnis der Schlagzeugklnge auf Seite 121. * Reportez-vous la Liste dassignation instrument de batterie/touche du clavier donne la page 121. * Consulte la Lista de asignaciones de teclas/batera en la pgina 121.

120

Style List / Rhythmusverzeichnis / Liste des styles / Lista de estilos

Group Style Name BEAT

POP Pop Ballad 1 4/4

Pop Ballad 2 4/4

Light Pop 4/4

Piano Ballad 4/4

Organ Ballad 4/4

8Beat 4/4

Folk 4/4

Pop Rhumba 4/4

NewAge 4/4

16BEAT 16Bt Ballad1 4/4

16Bt Ballad2 4/4

16Bt Ballad3 4/4

16Beat Pop 4/4

Funk 4/4

Fusion 4/4

Fusion Balad 4/4

Fusion Shffl 4/4

Funky Jazz 4/4

DANCE POP Dance Pop1 4/4

Dance Pop2 4/4

Eurobeat 4/4

Techno 4/4

Synth Boogie 4/4

Disco Soul 4/4

Party Pop 4/4

Tropical 4/4

ROCK Upbeat Pop 4/4

Rock Ballad 4/4

Rock & Roll 4/4

Rock Shuffle 4/4

Pop Shuffle 4/4

Jazz Rock 4/4

Twist 4/4

Soul 4/4

Rhythm&Blues 4/4

Group Style Name BEAT

TRADITIONAL March 1 4/4

March 2 4/4

Polka 4/4

6/8 March 4/4

Tarantella 4/4

Showtune 4/4

Show Time 4/4

Overture 4/4

Ragtime 2/4

COUNTRY Bluegrass 4/4

8Beat Cntry 4/4

Country Rock 4/4

Country Pop 4/4

Folk Rock 4/4

Country Shfl 4/4

Cntry 2 Step 4/4

Cntry Ballad 4/4

CowboyBoogie 4/4

WALTZ Trad. Wlatz1 3/4

Trad. Waltz2 3/4

CntryT.Waltz 3/4

Vienna Waltz 3/4

Flamenco 3/4

Jazz Waltz 3/4

Swing Waltz 3/4

Cntry Waltz 3/4

Slow Waltz 3/4

Gospel Waltz 3/4

Group Style Name BEAT

BALLAD Jazz Ballad1 4/4

Jazz Ballad2 4/4

Slow Rock 1 4/4

Slow Rock 2 4/4

Blues 4/4

BigBandBalad 4/4

Gospel 3/4

Enka 4/4

Pops Enka 4/4

JAZZ Swing 4/4

Cool Jazz 4/4

Uptempo Jazz 4/4

Bigband Jazz 4/4

Dixieland 4/4

Boogie 4/4

Charleston 4/4

2Beat Swing 4/4

Foxtrot 4/4

Trad. Swing 4/4

LATIN Rhumba 1 4/4

Rhumba 2 4/4

Mambo 4/4

Tango 4/4

Cha Cha 4/4

Bolero 4/4

Beguine 4/4

Merengue 4/4

Son 4/4

LATIN POP Bossanova1 4/4

Bossanova2 4/4

Pop Bossa 4/4

Reggae 4/4

Pop Reggae 4/4

Samba 1 4/4

Samba 2 4/4

Jazz Samba 4/4

Salsa 4/4

121

Keyboard MIDI Key Alternate Note Note# Note off assign Standard Kit Room Kit Rock Kit Electro Kit Analog Kit Jazz Kit Brush Kit Classic Kit

C#1 13 C#-1 3 Surdo Mute < < < < < < < D1 14 D-1 3 Surdo Open < < < < < < < D#1 15 D#-1 Hi Q < < < < < < < E1 16 E-1 Whip Slap < < < < < < < F1 17 F-1 4 Scratch Push < < < < < < < F#1 18 F#-1 4 Scratch Pull < < < < < < < G1 19 G-1 Finger Snap < < < < < < < G#1 20 G#-1 Click Noise < < < < < < < A1 21 A-1 Metronome Click < < < < < < < A#1 22 A#-1 Metronome Bell < < < < < < < B1 23 B-1 Seq Click L < < < < < < < C2 24 C0 Seq Click H < < < < < < < C#2 25 C#0 Brush Tap < < < < < < < D2 26 D0 O Brush Swirl L < < < < < < < D#2 27 D#0 Brush Slap < < < < < < < E2 28 E0 O Brush Swirl H < < Reverse Cymbal Reverse Cymbal < < < F2 29 F0 O Snare Roll < < < < < < < F#2 30 F#0 Castanet < < Hi Q Hi Q < < < G2 31 G0 Snare L < SD Rock M Snare M SD Rock H < Brush Slap L < G#2 32 G#0 Sticks < < < < < < < A2 33 A0 Bass Drum L < Bass Drum M Bass Drum H 4 Bass Drum M < < < A#2 34 A#0 Open Rim Shot < < < < < < < B2 35 B0 Bass Drum M < Bass Drum H 3 BD Rock BD Analog L < < < C3 36 C1 Bass Drum H BD Room BD Rock BD Gate BD Analog H BD Jazz BD Soft Gran Cassa C#3 37 C#1 Side Stick < < < Analog Side Stick < < < D3 38 D1 Snare M < SD Rock SD Rock L Analog Snare L < Brush Slap < D#3 39 D#1 Hand Clap < < < < < < < E3 40 E1 Snare H < SD Rock Rim SD Rock H Analog Snare H < Brush Tap < F3 41 F1 Floor Tom L Room Tom 1 Rock Tom 1 E Tom 1 Analog Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 Brush Tom 1 Jazz Tom 1 F#3 42 F#1 1 Hi-Hat Closed < < < Analog HH Closed 1 < < < G3 43 G1 Floor Tom H Room Tom 2 Rock Tom 2 E Tom 2 Analog Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 Brush Tom 2 Jazz Tom 2 G#3 44 G#1 1 Hi-Hat Pedal < < < Analog HH Closed 2 < < < A3 45 A1 Low Tom Room Tom 3 Rock Tom 3 E Tom 3 Analog Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 Brush Tom 3 Jazz Tom 3 A#3 46 A#1 1 Hi-Hat Open < < < Analog HH Open < < < B3 47 B1 Mid Tom L Room Tom 4 Rock Tom 4 E Tom 4 Analog Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 Brush Tom 4 Jazz Tom 4 C4 48 C2 Mid Tom H Room Tom 5 Rock Tom 5 E Tom 5 Analog Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 Brush Tom 5 Jazz Tom 5 C#4 49 C#2 Crash Cymbal 1 < < < Analog Cymbal < < Hand Cym.Open L D4 50 D2 High Tom Room Tom 6 Rock Tom 6 E Tom 6 Analog Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 Brush Tom 6 Jazz Tom 6 D#4 51 D#2 Ride Cymbal 1 < < < < < < Hand Cym.Closed L E4 52 E2 Chinese Cymbal < < < < < < < F4 53 F2 Ride Cymbal Cup < < < < < < < F#4 54 F#2 Tambourine < < < < < < < G4 55 G2 Splash Cymbal < < < < < < < G#4 56 G#2 Cowbell < < < Analog Cowbell < < < A4 57 A2 Crash Cymbal 2 < < < < < < Hand Cym.Open H A#4 58 A#2 Vibraslap < < < < < < < B4 59 B2 Ride Cymbal 2 < < < < < < Hand Cym.Closed H C5 60 C3 Bongo H < < < < < < < C#5 61 C#3 Bongo L < < < < < < < D5 62 D3 Conga H Mute < < < Analog Conga H < < < D#5 63 D#3 Conga H Open < < < Analog Conga M < < < E5 64 E3 Conga L < < < Analog Conga L < < < F5 65 F3 Timbale H < < < < < < < F#5 66 F#3 Timbale L < < < < < < < G5 67 G3 Agogo H < < < < < < < G#5 68 G#3 Agogo L < < < < < < < A5 69 A3 Cabasa < < < < < < < A#5 70 A#3 Maracas < < < Analog Maracas < < < B5 71 B3 O Samba Whistle H < < < < < < < C6 72 C4 O Samba Whistle L < < < < < < < C#6 73 C#4 Guiro Short < < < < < < < D6 74 D4 O Guiro Long < < < < < < < D#6 75 D#4 Claves < < < Analog Claves < < < E6 76 E4 Wood Block H < < < < < < < F6 77 F4 Wood Block L < < < < < < < F#6 78 F#4 Cuica Mute < < Scratch Push Scratch Push < < < G6 79 G4 Cuica Open < < Scratch Pull Scratch Pull < < < G#6 80 G#4 2 Triangle Mute < < < < < < < A6 81 A4 2 Triangle Open < < < < < < < A#6 82 A#4 Shaker < < < < < < < B6 83 B4 Jingle Bell < < < < < < < C7 84 C5 Bell Tree < < < < < < <

< indicates the content is the same as that of Standard Kit. The Drum Kit voices respond to and transmit the corresponding MIDI note

numbers. Key Off: Keys marked O stop sounding the instant they are released. Alternate Assign: Playing any instrument within a numbered group will imme-

diately stop the sound of any other instrument in the same group of the same number.

Drum/key Assignment List / Verzeichnis der Schlagzeugklnge / Liste dassignation instrument de batterie/touche du clavier / Lista de asignaciones de teclas/batera

< bedeutet wie Standard Kit. Die Schlagzeug-Stimmen sprechen auf MIDI-Notennummern an und

bertragen entsprechende Nummern. Key Off: Durch O gekennzeichnete Klnge verstummen beim Loslassen der

Taste. Alternate Assign: Mit derselben Nummer gekennzeichnete Klnge werden von

demselben Instrument erzeugt und knnen daher nicht gleichzeitig produziert werden. Spielt einer dieser Klnge gerade, wird er beim Anschlagen einer anderen Taste mit derselben Alternate Assign-Nummer stummgeschaltet.

< indique que le contenu est le mme que celui de Standard Kit. Les voix Drum Kit rpondent aux et transmettent les numros de note MIDI

correspondant. Key off : Le son produit par les touches marques O cesse linstant o la

touche est relche. Alternate Assign : Le fait de jouer un instrument appartenant un groupe ayant

un numro arrte immdiatement le son de tout autre instrument appartenant un groupe ayant le mme numro.

< indica que el contenido es el mismo que el del juego estndar. Las voces del juego de batera responden a los nmeros de notas MIDI

correspondientes y los transmiten. Key Off: Las teclas marcadas con O dejan de sonar en el momento en que se

sueltan. Alternate Assign: Al tocar algn instrumento con un grupo numerado detendr

inmediatamente el sonido de cualquier otro instrumento del mismo grupo con el mismo nmero.

122

Backed Up Parameters / Dauerhaft gespeicherte Parameter / Paramtres sauvegards / Parmetros respaldados

Backup Recall Default

VOICE SETTING Backup Off Keyboard Voice O O Grand Piano 1

Keyboard Volume O O 100

Split Point O O F#2

Dual Mode O Off

Split Mode O Off

Dual Voice O O Strings Slow

Split Voice O O Acous. Bass 1

Dual Balance O O Center

Split Balance O O Center

Dual Detune Depth O O 5

Reverb On/Off O O On

Reverb Type O O Hall 1

Reverb Depth O O 50 (Total, Rhythm, Bass, Chord, Keyboard)

Effect On/Off O O Preset for each voice

Effect Type O O Preset for each voice

Effect Depth O O (Main Voice) Preset for each voice (Dual Voice, Split Voice) 50

Touch Sensitivity O O Normal

Right/1 Octave Shift O O 0

Left Octave Shift O O +1

2nd Octave Shift O O 0

Right/1 Pan O O Center

Left Pan O O Center

2nd Pan O O Center

Transpose O O 0

Voice within each group O O First voice within each group

STYLE SETTING Backup Off ABC On/Off O Off

Small ABC On/Off O Off

Harmony On/Off O Off

Harmony Type O O Trio

Style O O Pop Ballad 1

Main A/B O Main A

Tempo O O Preset for each style

Rhythm Volume O O 90

Bass Volume O O 90

Chord Volume O O 90

Pad Volume O O 90

Phrase Volume O O 90

Harmony Volume O O 90

Metronome O O Normal

One Touch Setting O O First setup in the list Setup Selection (CVP-79A/69/69A)

Style within each group O O First style within each group

SONG SETTING Backup Off Song List Priority O O DOC

Guide Mode O O Next Note

Part Assign O O Part1=Track1, Part2=Off

MIDI Backup Off Send Channel Right/1 O O 1 ch

Send Channel Left O O Off

Local On/Off O O On

Clock Internal/External O O Internal

Backup Recall Default

Program Change Send O O Send & Receive & Receive/Off

Control Change Send O O Send & Receive & Receive/Off

Start/Stop Command O O Send & Receive Send & Receive/Off

Transpose Receive On/Off O O On

Transpose Send On/Off O O Off

ABC & Rhythm Send On/Off O O Off

Harmony Send On/Off O O Off

TUNE/MICRO TUNING Backup Off Tune O 440.0

Micro-tuning O 0

PEDAL Backup Off Left Pedal Function O Soft

Damper Range O R

Damper Mode (CVP-79A) O Continuous

POPUP & ALERT Backup On Voice/Style Popup Time O 8

Others Popup Time O 8

Alert Voice O Steel Drums

Alert Volume O 50

ABC MODE Backup On ABC Mode O Single Finger

REGISTRATION O O Backup On ALL SETUP O

The LCD contrast, help language and this backup on/off setting itself are always backed up. The initial LCD contrast, help language and this backup on/off setting itself are not recalled by

the recall function. These and all other settings can be reset to the initial factory values by turning the power on while holding the C7 key. Default Values: LCD contrast= 10, Help language= English

Die Displaykontrasteinstellung, die Spracheneinstellung sowie die BACKUP-Einstellungen werden in jedem Fall dauerhaft gespeichert.

Die Displaykontrasteinstellung, die Spracheneinstellung sowie die BACKUP-Einstellung selbst sind von der Rcksetzung durch die RECALL-Funktion ausgeschlossen. Diese und alle anderen Einstellungen knnen auf die werkseitigen Standardwerte rckgesetzt werden, indem Sie das Instrument bei gedrckt gehaltener C7-Taste einschalten. Standardwerte: Displaykontrast = 10, Sprache fr Help-Text = Englisch.

Les rglages de contraste de laffichage, de langue de la fonction Aide et de la fonction Backup sont toujours conservs en mmoire.

Le contraste de laffichage, la langue de la fonction Aide et les rglages de la fonction Backup dorigine ne peuvent pas tre rappels en utilisant la fonction de remise ltat initial RECALL. Ces rglages, comme tous les autres rglages, peuvent tre rtablis en mettant linstrument sous tension tout en maintenant enfonce la touche du clavier C7. Default Values: LCD contrast= 10, Help language= English

Los ajustes del contraste del LCD, del idioma de ayuda y este ajuste de activacin/ desactivacin de respaldo siempre estn respaldados.

Los ajustes iniciales del contraste del LCD, del idioma de ayuda y los ajustes de arriba de activacin/desactivacin de respaldo no se activan con esta funcin. Estos y otros ajustes podr reponerse a sus valores iniciales de fbrica conectando la alimentacin mientras se mantiene presionada la tecla C7. Valores de ajuste de fbrica: Contraste del LCD = 10, idioma de ayuda = Ingls

* REGISTRATION includes all of the panel setup data in the 25 or 15 Registration memories. See page 58 for a list of data contained in the Registration memory.

* ALL SETUP includes all of the above parameters (including the marked parameters) and REGISTRATION data.

* REGISTRATION schliet alle Bedienfeld-Setups in den 25 bzw. 15 Registration- Speicherpltzen mit ein. Eine Liste der in den Registration-Setups gespeicherten Daten finden Sie auf Seite 58.

* ALL SETUP schliet alle der obigen Parameter (auch die mit markierten) sowie REGISTRATION-Daten mit ein.

* REGISTRATION comprend toutes les donnes de rglage de panneau contenues dans les 25 ou 15 emplacements de mmoire de registration. La liste des donnes contenues dans la mmoire de registration est donne la page 58.

* ALL SETUP comprend tous les paramtres et donnes de registration mentionns ci- dessus, (y compris les paramtres indiqus par ).

* REGISTRATION incluye todos los datos de ajustes del panel de las 25 15 memorias de registros. Vea la pgina 58 para encontrar la lista de los datos contenidos en la memoria de registros.

* ALL SETUP incluye todos los parmetros de arriba (incluyendo los parmetros marcados con ) y los datos de REGISTRATION.

123

Fingering Chart / Akkordkiste / Tablature / Grfica de digitado

C C6 CM7 (b5)CM7

(

)

(

)

(#11)CM7

Cadd9 (9)CM7

(

)

(

)

(

)

(9)C 6 C(b5) Caug

(#5)CM77C (#5)

(

)

Cm6Cm Cm7

(b5)Cm7 (

)

(9)Cm7 CmM7 (b5)Cmadd9

(

)

(11)Cm7

(

)

(

)

Cm (b5)CmM7 Cdim

(

)

(

)

CmM7 (9) 7 7C

C sus 47

(

)

(

)

(

)

(9)C7 (#11)C7

(

)

7C (b5)

(

)

(13)C7

7C (b9)

(

)

(b13)C7 Csus 47C (#9)

(

)

* All fingerings shown are simple root-position types. * Die hier gezeigten Akkorde sind jeweils die Grundakkorde. * Tous les doigts indiqus sont du type position fondamentale simple. * Todos los digitados se muestran como tipos de posicin de raz sencilla.

Example for C chords Beispiele fr C-Akkorde Exemples daccords en C Ejemplo de acordes C

124

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des

1.2.10 Harmonic Content

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 71 Harmonic Content 0...127

(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

Applies adjustment to the resonance value set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change, with value 64 producing zero adjustment. As values get higher the sound becomes increasingly eccentric. Note that for some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.

1.2.11 Release Time

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 72 Release Time 0...127

(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

Applies adjustment to the envelope release time set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change, with value 64 producing zero adjustment.

1.2.12 Attack Time

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 73 Attack Time 0...127

(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

Applies adjustment to the envelope attack time set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change, with value 64 producing zero adjustment. Depending on the particular voice type, Attack Time data will have little or no affect.

1.2.13 Brightness

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 74 Brightness 0...127

(0:-64, 64:+0, 127:+63)

Applies adjustment to the cutoff frequency set by the voice. This parameter specifies relative change, with value 64 producing zero adjustment. Lower voices produce a softer sound. For some voices the effective parameter range is narrower than the legal parameter range.

1.2.14 Portamento Control

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 84 Portamento Control 0...127

Message should be sent with Note On already sounding. The data value sets the portamento source key number. The channel with change from the currently sounding pitch to the next received Note-On key using Portamento Time of 0.

1.2.15 Effect1 Depth ( Reverb Send Level )

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 91 Effect1 Depth 0...127

Adjusts the reverb send level.

1.2.16 Effect3 Depth ( Chorus Send Level )

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 93 Effect3 Depth 0...127

Adjusts the chorus send level.

1. Channel Messages

1.1 Key On and Key Off Receivable note range: C-2 to G8 (true voice A-1 to C7) Velocity range: 1 to 127 (Value accepted only at Note On)

1.2 Control Change If the Control Change Filter in Function [MIDI 2] is set to ON transmission and reception are disabled.

1.2.1 Bank Select

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 0 Bank Select MSB 0:Normal, 127:Drum 32 Bank Select LSB 0...127

A new bank selection does not become effective until receipt of the next Program Change message.

1.2.2 Modulation

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 1 Modulation 0...127

1.2.3 Data Entry

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 6 Data Entry MSB 0...127 38 Data Entry LSB 0...127

Sets the value for the parameter specified by RPN/NRPN.

1.2.4 Main Volume

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 7 Volume MSB 0...127

1.2.5 Pan

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 10 Panpot MSB 0...127

0 = left; 127 = right

1.2.6 Expression

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 11 Expression MSB 0...127

1.2.7 Damper

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 64 Damper MSB 0...127

Half pedal continuous data is received and accepted.

1.2.8 Sostenuto

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 66 Sostenuto 0...127

(0-63:off, 64-127:on)

1.2.9 Soft Pedal

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 67 Soft Pedal 0...127

Half pedal continuous data is received and accepted.

If youre already very familiar with MIDI, or are using a computer to control your music hardware with computer-gen- erated MIDI messages, the data provided in this section can help you to control the Clavinova.

Falls Sie bereits mit MIDI vertraut sind oder einen Computer zur Hardware-Steuerung einsetzen, werden Ihnen die nachfolgend aufgefhrten Daten bei der Steuerung des Clavinovas wahrscheinlich hilfreich sein.

Si vous vous tes dj familiariss avec linterface MIDI, ou si vous utilisez un ordinateur pour commander votre matriel de musique au moyen de messages MIDI gnrs par ordinateur, les donnes suivantes vous aideront commander le Clavinova.

Si ya est muy familiarizado con MIDI o si est usando una computadora para controlar su msica con mensajes MIDI generados por computadora, los datos proporcionados en esta seccin le ayudarn a controlar la Clavinova.

The Clavinova corresponds to a portion of the XG format, the Clavinova does not perfectly correspond to all XG parameters.

125

dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

1.2.17 Effect4 Depth ( Variation Effect Send Level )

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 94 Effect4 Depth 0...127

when Variation Connection = 1 (System)

Adjusts the variation effect send level. Not effective if Variation Connection is set to 0 (Insertion).

1.2.18 Data Increment / Decrement (for RPN)

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 96 RPN Increment 0...127 97 RPN Decrement 0...127

The data byte has no meaning.

This message adds or subtracts 1 to/from the Pitchbend Sensitivity, Fine Tune, and Coarse Tune MSBs. Note that the Increment (Decrement) message will not change a setting that has already reached its maximum (minimum) value. Incrementation or decrementation of the Fine Tune value never carries over to the Coarse Tune value.

1.2.19 NRPN (Nonregistered parameter number)

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 98 RPN LSB 0...127 99 RPN MSB 0...127

First send the NPRN MSB and LSB to select the control parameter, then set the value by Data Entry. The following NRPN values are supported.

NRPN Data entry MSB LSB MSB Parameter Data Range

$01 $08 $mm Vibrato Rate mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $09 $mm Vibrato Depth mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $0A $mm Vibrato Delay mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $20 $mm Filter Cutoff Freq. mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $21 $mm Filter Resonance mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $63 $mm EG Attack Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $64 $mm EG Decay Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$01 $66 $mm EG Release Time mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63)

$14 $rr $mm Drum Filter Cutoff Freq. mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number

$15 $rr $mm Drum Filter Resonance mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number

$16 $rr $mm Drum EG Attack Rate mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number

$17 $rr $mm Drum EG Decay Rate mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number (Effects both Decay 1 and Decay 2)

$18 $rr $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Coarse mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number

$19 $rr $mm Drum Instrument Pitch Fine mm : $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) rr : drum instrument note number

$1A $rr $mm Drum Instrument Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 to Max) rr : drum instrument note number

$1C $rr $mm Drum Instrument Panpot mm : $00, $01 - $40 - $7F (Random, L C R) rr : drum instrument note number

$1D $rr $mm Drum Instrument Reverb Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 to Max) rr : drum instrument note number

$1E $rr $mm Drum Instrument Chorus Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 to Max) rr : drum instrument note number

$1F $rr $mm Drum Instrument Variation Send Level mm : $00 - $7F (0 to Max) rr : drum instrument note number

The LSB 14H-1FH (for drums) message will be accepted under the following conditions, the channel must be set to the drum mode, and drum setups 1 or 2 must be set to that channel. (Default = drum setup 1.)

Note: The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S contain 3 drum setups (1 Preset Drum & Drum Setup 1, 2). Preset Drum being the preset drum setup, its parameters cannot be rewritten.

1.2.20 RPN (Registered parameter number)

Cntrl# Parameter Data Range 100 RPN LSB 0...127 101 RPN MSB 0...127

Default:7F 7FH

The following parameters are supported.

NRPN Data entry MSBLSB MSB Parameter Data Range

00H 00H mmH -- Pitchbend Sensitivity mm: 00-0cH(0-12 semitones:1 octave) Can be set up 1 octave, in semitone units. Default: 02H LSB is ignored.

00H 01H mmH 11H Fine Tuning mm:00H-40H-7FH(-64-0-+63)

00H 02H mmH -- Course Tuning mm:28H - 40H - 58H(-24-+24 semitones) LSB is ignored.

7FH 7FH -- -- RPN Null Clears current RPN and NRPN number settings. Does not change internal parameter settings.

1.2.21 Channel Mode Messages

The following Channel Mode messages are supported. (But the actual mode is fixed to Poly and can not be changed.)

2nd byte 3rd byte 120 0 All Sound Off 121 0 Reset All Controllers 123 0 All Notes Off 124 0 Omni Off 125 0 Omni On 126 0 ~ 16 Mono 127 0 Poly

1.2.21.1 All Sound Off

Switches off all sound from the channel. Does not reset Note On and Hold On conditions established by Channel Messages.

1.2.21.2 Reset All Controllers

Resets controllers as follows.

Controller Value Pitchbend change +-0 (center) Modulation 0 (off) Expression 127 (max) Damper Pedal 0 (off) Sostenuto 0 (off) Soft Pedal 0 (off) Portamento Control Resets portamento source note number RPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged.) NRPN Sets number to null. (Internal data remains unchanged.)

126

1.2.21.3 All Notes Off

Switches off all of the channels on notes. Any notes being held by HOLD1 or SOSTENUTO continue to sound until HOLD1/SOSTENUTO goes off.

1.2.21.4 Omni Off

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

1.2.21.5 Omni On

Same processing as for All Notes Off.

1.2.21.6 Mono

Same processing as for All Sound Off.

1.2.21.7 Poly

Same processing as for All Sound Off.

1.3 Program Change If the Program Change Filter in Function [MIDI 2] is set to ON transmission and reception are disabled.

1.4 Pitchbend

2. System Exclusive Messages

2.1 Parameter Change The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S models support the following Parameter Change messages.

[UNIVERSAL REALTIME MESSAGE ] 1) Master Volume

[UNIVERSAL NON-REALTIME MESSAGE ] 3) General MIDI Mode On

[XG NATIVE ] 1) XG System on 2) XG System Data parameter change 3) Multi Effect1 Data parameter change 4) Drum Setup Data parameter change

[Others] 1) Master tuning 2) Channel Detune 3) Volume & Expression Realtime Control off

2.1.2 Universal Realtime Message

2.1.2.1 Master Volume

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111111 7F = Universal Realtime 01111111 7F = ID of target device 00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume 0sssssss *SS = Volume LSB 0ttttttt TT = Volume MSB 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive or 11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111111 7F = Universal Realtime 0xxxnnnn XN = When N is received N=0~F, whichever is received.

x = don't care 00000100 04 = Sub-ID #1=Device Control Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=Master Volume 0sssssss SS = Volume LSB 0ttttttt TT = Volume MSB 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

The volume for all channels will be changed. *Hexadecimal representation of 0sssss ss. (Same below)

2.1.3 Universal Non-Realtime Message

2.1.3.1 General MIDI Mode On

11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111110 7E = Universal Non-Realtime 01111111 7F = ID of target device 00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive or 11110000 F0 = Exclusive status 01111110 7E = Universal Non-Realtime 0xxxnnnn XN = When N is received N=0~F, whichever is received.

X = don't care 00001001 09 = Sub-ID #1=General MIDI Message 00000001 01 = Sub-ID #2=General MIDI On 11110111 F7 = End of Exclusive

When the General MIDI mode ON message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. This message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent.

2.1.4 XG Native Parameter Change

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 1n When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

When n is transmitted n always=0. 01001100 4C Model ID of XG 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low 0ddddddd ddddddd Data | | 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Data size must match parameter size (2 or 4 bytes).

2.1.4.1 XG System On

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 1N When N is received N=0~F, whichever is received.

When N is transmitted N always=0. 01001100 4C Model ID of XG 0aaaaaaa 00 Address High 0aaaaaaa 00 Address Mid 0aaaaaaa 7E Address Low 00000000 00 Data 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When the XG System On message is received, the MIDI system will be reset to its default settings. The message requires approximately 50ms to execute, so sufficient time should be allowed before the next message is sent.

2.1.4.2 XG System Data parameter change

See Tables 1-1, 1-2.

2.1.4.3 Multi Effect1 Data parameter change

See Tables 1-1, 1-3.

2.1.4.4 Multi Part Data parameter change

See Tables 1-1, 1-4.

2.1.4.5 Drum Setup Data parameter change

See Tables 1-1, 1-5. If operation is in XG mode, this message reinitializes all drum setup parameters. The drum setup will not be reset if any changes are made from the CVP 79A/69/69A/ 59S front panel.

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

127

2.1.5 Other Parameter Changes

2.1.5.1 Master Tuning

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 1n When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

When n is transmitted n always=0. 00100111 27 Model ID 00000001 30 Sub ID 00000000 00 00000000 00 0mmmmmmm mm Master Tune MSB 0lllllll ll Master Tune LSB 0ccccccc cc 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

Changes tuning of all channels.

2.1.5.2 Channel Detune

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 73 Clavinova ID 00111001 39 CVP-79A/69/69A/59S ID 00010001 11 Sub ID 0000nnnn 0n n = MIDI Channel 01000011 43 Dual Detune 0vvvvvvv vv Value vv: $00 - $40 - $7F (-64 - 0 - +63) 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

The Channel Detune message only affects the specified channel.

2.1.5.3 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0001nnnn 73 Clavinova ID 00111001 39 CVP-79A/69/69A/59S ID 00010001 11 Sub ID 0000nnnn 0n n = MIDI Channel 01000101 45 Volume and Expression Realtime Control Off 0vvvvvvv vv Value vv: $00:Off $7F:On 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

When On is received subsequent volume and expression changes are only valid during key on. Normal operation resumes when Off is received.

2.2 Bulk Dump The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S models support the following parameters.

[XG NATIVE ] 1) XG System Data 2) Multi Effect1 Data 3) Drums Setup Data

2.2.1 XG Native Bulk Data

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0000nnnn 0n When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

When n is transmitted n always=0. 01001100 4C Model ID of XG 0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount 0bbbbbbb bbbbbbb ByteCount 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low 00000000 00 Data | | | | 0ccccccc ccccccc Check sum 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For information about Address and Byte Count fields, refer to attached tables. In the attached tables TOTAL SIZE partitions a data series into single bulk dumps. The address is the first byte of the bulk data. The checksum value is set such that the sum of Byte Count, Address, Data, and Checksum has value zero in its seven least significant bits.

If too much bulk data is received at a time there is a chance of error. The total data for a bulk dump should not exceed 512 bytes, it is recommended that data be kept under 512 bytes with an interval time of 120msec or more between 512 byte bulk.

2.2.1.1 XG System Data bulk dump

See Tables 1-1, 1-2.

2.2.1.2 Multi Effect1 Data bulk dump

See Tables 1-1, 1-3.

2.2.1.3 Drums Setup Data bulk dump

See Tables 1-1, 1-5.

2.3 Parameter Request The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S models support the following request for parameters covered by Parameter Change specifications.

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0011nnnn 3n When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

When n is transmitted n always=0. 01001100 4C Model ID of XG 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

If the parameters data size is 2 or 4. The Parameter Request address for that parameter is the first byte of the bulk.

2.4 Dump Request The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S models support the following request for data covered by bulk dump.

11110000 F0 Exclusive status 01000011 43 YAMAHA ID 0010nnnn 2n When n is received n=0~F, whichever is received.

When n is transmitted n always=0. 01001100 4C Model ID of XG 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address High 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Mid 0aaaaaaa aaaaaaa Address Low 11110111 F7 End of Exclusive

For more information on the Address field, refer to the attached table. In the attached tables TOTAL SIZE partitions a data series into single bulk dumps. The address is the first byte of the bulk data.

3. Realtime Messages

3.1 Active Sensing

a) Transmission Transmitted approximately once every 200msec.

b) Reception If no MIDI data is received within 400ms following receipt of FE, the unit executes processing equivalent to ALL SOUND OFF, ALL NOTES OFF, and RESET ALL CONTROLLERS, then clears any remaining FEs.

3.2 MIDI Clock

a) Transmission Transmitted as 1/96 clocks.

b) Reception If the [MIDI 1] clock function is set to the External mode it will receive a resolution of 1/96 clocks.

3.3 Start/Stop

If the [MIDI 2] function Start/Stop filter is ON transmission and reception are disabled.

a) Transmission All rhythm start and stop signals are transmitted.

b) Reception When the relative message is received, the rhythm or song will start or stop.

128

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

Parameter Change Address

(H) (M) (L) Description CVP MIDI 00 00 00 System SYSTEM 00 00 7D Drum Setup Reset

00 00 7E XG System On 00 00 7F Reset All Parameters

EFFECT 1 02 01 00 Effect1(Reverb,Chorus,Variation ) DRUM 30 18 00 Drum Setup 1

31 18 00 Drum Setup 2

Note: The CVP 79A/69/69A/59S contain 3 drum setups (1 Preset Drum & Drum Setup 1, 2). Preset Drum being the preset drum setup, its parameters cannot be rewritten.

Address Parameter 3n 0B 00 note number 13 3n 0C 00 note number 14 : : 3n 5B 00 note number 91

m

Parameter Base Address Model ID = 4C

Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value (H) (H) (H) (H) 00 00 00 4 0000 - 07FF MASTER TUNE -102.4 - +102.3[cent] 00 04 00 00

01 1st bit3-0bit15-12 -400 02 2nd bit3-0bit11-8 03 3rd bit3-0bit7-4

4th bit3-0bit3-0 04 1 00 - 7F MASTER VOLUME 0 - 127 7F 06 1 28 - 58 TRANSPOSE -24 - +24[semitones] 40 07 1 7D n DRUM SETUP RESET n=Drum setup number 7E 00 XG SYSTEM ON 00=XG sytem ON 7F 00 RESET ALL PARAMETERS 00=ON (receive only)

TOTAL SIZE 07

MIDI Parameter Change table ( SYSTEM )

Refer to the Effect MIDI Map for a complete list of Reverb, Chorus and Variation type numbers. Refer to the Effect Parameter List for a detailed description of each parameter.

Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value (H) (H) (H) (H) 02 01 00 2 00-7F REVERB TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 01(=HALL1)

00-7F REVERB TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00 02 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 1 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 03 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 2 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 04 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 3 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 05 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 4 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 06 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 5 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 07 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 6 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 08 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 7 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 09 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 8 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 0A 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 9 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 0B 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 10 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 0C 1 00-7F REVERB RETURN -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 0D 1 01-7F REVERB PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40

TOTAL SIZE 0E

02 01 10 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 11 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 12 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 12 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 13 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 13 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 14 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 14 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 15 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type 15 1 00-7F REVERB PARAMETER 16 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on reverb type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 20 2 00-7F CHORUS TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 41(=CHORUS1) 00-7F CHORUS TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

22 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 1 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 23 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 2 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 24 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 3 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 25 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 4 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 26 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 5 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 27 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 6 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 28 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 7 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 29 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 8 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 2A 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 9 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 2B 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 10 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 2C 1 00-7F CHORUS RETURN -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 2D 1 01-7F CHORUS PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40 2E 1 00-7F SEND CHORUS TO REVERB -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00

TOTAL SIZE 0F

02 01 30 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 31 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 12 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 32 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 13 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 33 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 14 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 34 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 15 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type 35 1 00-7F CHORUS PARAMETER 16 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on chorus type

TOTAL SIZE 6

02 01 40 2 00-7F VARIATION TYPE MSB Refer to Effect MIDI Map 05(=DELAY L,C,R) 00-7F VARIATION TYPE LSB 00 : basic type 00

42 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 1 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

129

44 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 2 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

46 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 3 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

48 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 4 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

4A 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

4C 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 5 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 6 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

4E 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 7 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

50 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 8 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

52 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 9 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

54 2 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 MSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 10 LSB Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on Variation type

56 1 00-7F VARIATION RETURN -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 40 57 1 01-7F VARIATION PAN L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 40 58 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO REVERB -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00 59 1 00-7F SEND VARIATION TO CHORUS -dB...0dB...+6dB(0...64...127) 00 5A 1 00-01 VARIATION CONNECTION 0:INSERTION,1:SYSTEM 00 5B 1 00-7F VARIATION PART OFF(127)

Part 1-16 (0-15) 5C 1 5D 1 5E 1 5F 1 60 1

TOTAL SIZE 21

02 01 70 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 11 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 71 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 12 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 72 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 13 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 73 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 14 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 74 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 15 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type 75 1 00-7F VARIATION PARAMETER 16 Refer to Effect Parameter List Depends on variation type

TOTAL SIZE 6

* VARIATION refers to the EFFECT on the panel.

MIDI Parameter Change table ( EFFECT 1)

MIDI Parameter Change table ( MULTI PART ) Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value (H) (H) (H) (H) 08 nn 07 1 00 - 01 PART MODE 0:NORMAL 00 (Part other than 10)

1:Preset Drum 01 (Part10) 2 - 3:Drum Setup 1, 2

nn 11 1 00 - 7F DRY LEVEL 0 - 127 7F nn 41 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 42 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING C# -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 43 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 44 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING D# -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 45 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING E -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 46 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 47 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING F# -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 48 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 49 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING G# -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4A 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4B 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING A# -64 - +63[cent] 40 nn 4C 1 00 - 7F SCALE TUNING B -64 - +63[cent] 40

nn = PartNumber For DRUM PART, the SCALE TUNING parameter is ineffective.

MIDI Parameter Change table ( DRUM SETUP ) Address Size Data Parameter Description Default value (H) (H) (H) (H) 3n rr 00 1 00 - 7F PITCH COARSE -64 - +63 40 3n rr 01 1 00 - 7F PITCH FINE -64 - +63[cent] 40 3n rr 02 1 00 - 7F LEVEL 0 - 127 Depends on note 3n rr 03 1 3n rr 04 1 00 - 7F PAN 0:random Depends on note

L63...C...R63(1...64...127) 3n rr 05 1 00 - 7F REVERB SEND 0 - 127 Depends on note 3n rr 06 1 00 - 7F CHORUS SEND 0 - 127 Depends on note 3n rr 07 1 00 - 7F VARIATION SEND 0 - 127 7F 3n rr 08 1 3n rr 09 1 3n rr 0A 1 3n rr 0B 1 00 - 7F FILTER CUTOFF FREQUENCY -64 - 63 40 3n rr 0C 1 00 - 7F FILTER RESONANCE -64 - 63 40 3n rr 0D 1 00 - 7F EG ATTACK -64 - 63 40 3n rr 0E 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY1 -64 - 63 40 3n rr 0F 1 00 - 7F EG DECAY2 -64 - 63 40 TOTAL SIZE 10

[Note] n: Drum Setup number (0 to 1) rr: Note number (0D to 54) Receipt of XG System On or GM System On message generates reinitialization of all DRUM SETUP parameters. Drum Setup Reset message can be used to reinitialize drum setup parameters.

130

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

REVERB TYPE TYPE MSB TYPE LSB DEC HEX 00 01 02 03~07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d~ 000 0 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 001 1 Hall1* Hall3 < < Hall2* Hall4 Hall5 < < < 002 2 Room4 Room5 Room6 < Room1* Room2* Room3* Room7 < < 003 3 Stage3 Stage4 < < Stage1* Stage2* < < < < 004 4 Plate2 < < < Plate1* Plate3 < < < < 005 5 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 015 F No Effect < < < < < < < < < 016 10 WhiteRoom* < < < < < < < < < 017 11 Tunnel* < < < < < < < < < 018 12 Canyon* (79) < < < < < < < < < 019 13 Basement* < < < < < < < < < 020 14 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 127 7F No Effect < < < < < < < < <

< .......... Same as Basic Effect (LSB=0) * ............. Used in Panel REVERB SW (79) ...... CVP-79A only

CHORUS TYPE TYPE MSB TYPE LSB DEC HEX 00 01 02 03~07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d~ 000 0 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 001 1 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 064 40 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 065 41 Chorus4 Chorus2 Chorus3 < < < < < < < 066 42 Celeste Celeste2 Celeste3 < Celeste4 Celeste5 Chorus1 < < < 067 43 Flanger2 Flanger3 < < Flanger1 Flanger4 Flanger5 < < < 068 44 Symphonic (79) < < < < < < < < < 069 45 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 071 47 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 072 48 Phaser (79) < < < < < < < < < 073 49 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 127 7F No Effect < < < < < < < < <

< .......... Same as Basic Effect (LSB=0) (79) ....... CVP-79A only

VARIATION TYPE TYPE MSB TYPE LSB DEC HEX 00 01 02 03~07 08 09 0a 0b 0c 0d~ 000 0 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 001 1 Hall1 Hall3 < < Hall2 Hall4 Hall5 < < < 002 2 Room4 Room5 Room6 < Room1 Room2 Room3 Room7 < < 003 3 Stage3 Stage4 < < Stage1 Stage2 < < < < 004 4 Plate2 < < < Plate1 Plate3 < < < < 005 5 Delay L, C, R* < < < Delay2 Delay3 < < < < 006 6 Delay L, R* < < < < < < < < < 007 7 Echo* < < < < < < < < < 008 8 CrossDelay* < < < < < < < < < 009 9 EarlyRef.1 EarlyRef.2 < < < < < < < < 010 A GateReverb < < < < < < < < < 011 B ReverseGate < < < < < < < < < 012 C No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 019 13 No Effect < < < < < < < < < 020 14 Karaoke1 Karaoke2 Karaoke3 < < < < < < < 021 15 No Effect < < < < < < < < < : : : 063 3F No Effect < < < < < < < < < 064 40 Thru < < < < < < < < < 065 41 Chorus4 Chorus2* Chorus3* < < < < < < < 066 42 Celeste* Celeste2 Celeste3 < Celeste4 Celeste5 Chorus1* Celeste6 < < 067 43 Flanger2 Flanger3 < < Flanger1* Flanger4 Flanger5 < < < 068 44 Symphonic2 < < < Symphonic* < < < < < 069 45 RotarySp.Fast* < < < RotarySp.3 < RotarySp.4 RotarySp.5 < < 070 46 Tremolo* < < < Tremolo2 < Tremolo3 Tremolo4 < < 071 47 AutoPan2 < < < AutoPan* RotarySp.Slow* AutoPan3 AutoPan4 AutoPan5 < 072 48 Phaser* < < < < < < < < < 073 49 Distortion < < < < < < < < < 074 4A OverDrive < < < < < < < < < 075 4B AmpSim.1 < < < AmpSim.2 AmpSim.3 < < < < 076 4C 3BandEQ2 < < < BoostHL* 3BandEQ3 < < < < 077 4D 2BandEQ < < < < < < < < < 078 4E AutoWah2 < < < AutoWah* < < < < < 079 4F No Effect or Thru < < < < < < < < < 080 50 Detune* (79) < < < < < < < < < 081 51 No Effect or Thru < < < < < < < < < 082 52 TouchWah* (79) Wah+Dist (79) < < < < < < < < 083 53 Compressor* (79) < < < < < < < < < 084 54 NoizeGate (79) < < < < < < < < < 085 55 No Effect or Thru < < < < < < < < < : : 127 7F < < < < < < < < <

< .......... Same as Basic Effect (LSB=0) * ............. Used in Panel EFFECT SW (79) ...... CVP-79A only

Effect MIDI Map

131

BASIC EFFECT TYPE

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

CHORUS, CELESTE

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO PM Depth 0~127 0-63 0-127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 4 Delay Offset 0~127 0-127 0-127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 LFO AM Depth 0~127 0-127 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 16

FLANGER

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 4 Delay Offset 0~63 0-63 0-63 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 4-124 resoulusion = 3deg. 15 16

SYMPHONIC

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 Delay Offset 0~127 0-127 0-127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 15 16

ROTARY SPEAKER

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 15 16

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

TREMOLO

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 AM Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 PM Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg 4-124 resolution = 3deg. 15 Input Mode mono/stereo 0-1 16

AUTO PAN

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 L/R Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 F/R Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 4 PAN Direction L<->R,L->R,L<-R, 0-5 0-5

Lturn,Rturn,L/R 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 15 16

PHASER

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 Phase Shift Offset 0~127 0-127 0-127 4 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Stage 3~10 3-10 (4,6,8) 3-10 (6~10 (phaser1) / 3~5 (phaser2))

12 Diffusion Mono/Stereo 0-1 0-1 13 LFO Phase Difference -180~+180deg. 4-124 14 15 16

DISTORTION, OVERDRIVE

1 Drive 0~127 0-127 0-127 2 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 3 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 5 Output Level 0~127 0-127 0-127 6 7 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 28-54

100Hz~10.0kHz 8 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 9 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 10-120

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

Effect Parameter List

132

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

GUITAR AMP SIMULATOR

1 Drive 0~127 0-127 0-127 2 AMP Type Off,Stack,Combo,Tube 0-3 0-3 3 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Edge (Clip Curve) 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

MONO EQ (3BAND)

1 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 2 EQ Mid Frequency 500Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 28-54

100Hz~10.0kHz 3 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 4 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 10-120 5 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

STEREO EQ (2BAND)

1 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 2 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 3 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 4 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 EQ Mid Frequency 100Hz~10.0kHz 14-54 12 EQ Mid Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 13 EQ Mid Width 1.0~12.0 10-120 14 15 16

AUTO WAH

1 LFO Frequency 0.00~39.7Hz 0-127 0-127 2 LFO Depth 0~127 0-127 0-127 3 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127 0-127 4 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 10-120 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 32Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Drive 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

HALL, ROOM, STAGE, PLATE

1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 0-69 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 0-52 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 12 Density 0~3 0-4 *REV (0-4), 0-3

VAR (0-3) 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R~E=R~E

DELAY L, C, R

1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 3 Cch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 4 Feedback Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 6 Cch Level 0~127 0-127 0-127 7 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 12 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

DELAY L, R

1 Lch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 2 Rch Delay 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 3 Feedback Delay 1 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 4 Feedback Delay 2 0.1~715.0ms 1-7150 1-7150 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 6 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 12 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

ECHO

1 Lch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 2 Lch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 3 Rch Delay1 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 4 Rch Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 6 Lch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 7 Rch Delay2 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 8 Delay2 Level 0~127 0-127 0-127 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 12 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

133

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

CROSS DELAY

1 L->R Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 2 R->L Delay 0.1~355.0ms 1-3550 1-3550 3 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 4 Input Select L,R,L&R 0-2 0-2 5 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 12 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 13 EQ Low Frequency 50Hz~2.0kHz 8-40 14 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 15 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 16 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

EARLY REF

1 Type S-H, L-H, Rdm, Rvs, Plt, Spr 0-5 0-5 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 0-44 3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 0-10 4 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 0-52 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Liveness 0~10 0-10 0-10 12 Density 0~3 0-3 0-3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 14 15 16

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

1 Type TypeA,TypeB 0-1 0-1 2 Room Size 0.1~7.0 0-44 0-44 3 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 0-10 4 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 5 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 6 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 0-52 7 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Liveness 0~10 0-10 0-10 12 Density 0~3 0-3 0-3 13 High Damp 0.1~1.0 1-10 1-10 14 15 16

134

MIDI Data Format / MIDI-Datenformat / Format des dones MIDI / Formato de datos MIDI

OPTION EFFECT TYPE

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

PITCH CHANGE (CVP-79A only)

1 Pitch -24~+24 40-88 2 Initial Delay 0~127 0-127 3 Fine 1 -50~+50 14-114 4 Fine 2 -50~+50 14-114 5 Feedback Gain -99~+99% 1-127 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Pan 1 L63~R63 1-127 12 Output Level 1 0~127 0-127 13 Pan 2 L63~R63 1-127 14 Output Level 2 0~127 0-127 15 16

TOUCH WAH, WAH+DIST (CVP-79A only)

1 Sensitive 0~127 0-127 2 Cutoff Frequency Offset 0~127 0-127 3 Resonance 1.0~12.0 10-120 4 5 6 EQ Low Frequency 32Hz~2.0kHz 4-40 7 EQ Low Gain -12~+12dB 52-76 8 EQ High Frequency 500Hz~16.0kHz 28-58 9 EQ High Gain -12~+12dB 52-76

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Drive 0~127 0-127 12 13 14 15 16

COMPRESSOR (CVP-79A only)

1 Attack 1~40ms 0-19 2 Release 10~680ms 0-15 3 Threshold -48~-6dB 79-121 4 Ratio 1.0~20.0 0-7 5 Output Level 0~127 0-127 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

No. Parameter Data Range MIDI Value CVP-79A CVP-69/69A/59S

NOISE GATE (CVP-79A only)

1 Attack 1~40ms 0-19 2 Release 10~680ms 0-15 3 Threshold -72~-30dB 55-97 4 Output Level 0~127 0-127 5 6 7 8 9

10

11 12 13 14 15 16

WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON (CVP-79A only), BASEMENT

1 Reverb Time 0.3~30.0s 0-69 0-69 2 Diffusion 0~10 0-10 0-10 3 Initial Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 4 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 0-52 5 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 6 Width 0.5~10.2m 0-37 0-37 7 Heigt 0.5~20.2m 0-73 0-73 8 Depth 0.5~30.2m 0-104 0-104 9 Wall Vary 0~30 0-30 0-30

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 Rev Delay 0~63 0-63 0-63 12 Density 0~3 0-4 *REV (0-4), 0-3

VAR (0-3) 13 Er/Rev Balance E63>R~E=R~E

KARAOKE1, 2, 3

1 Delay Time 0~127 0-127 0-127 2 Feedback Level -63~+63 1-127 1-127 3 HPF Cutoff Thru~8.0kHz 0-52 0-52 4 LPF Cutoff 1.0k~Thru 34-60 34-60 5 6 7 8 9

10 Dry/Wet D63>W~D=W~D

11 12 13 14 15 16

135

Specifications / Technische Datan / Spcifications / Especificationes

CVP-79A CVP-69 CVP-69A CVP-59S

KEYBOARD 88 KEYS (A-1 C7)

TONE GENERATOR AWM (Advanced Wave Memory)

VOICE Voice Groups: PIANO, E. PIANO, HARPSICHORD, GUITAR, CLAVINOVA TONE/SYNTH, ORGAN, STRINGS/CHOIR, BRASS, SAX/FLUTE, BASS, DRUMS/PERCUSSIVE (192 voices for CVP-79A, 172 voices for CVP-69/69A/59S)

DUAL, SPLIT, EFFECT

STYLE Style Groups: POP, 16BEAT, DANCE POP, ROCK, BALLAD, JAZZ, LATIN, LATIN POP, TRADITIONAL, COUNTRY, WALTZ (100 styles)

DISK/CUSTOM, HARMONY, ONE TOUCH SETTING

AUTO BASS CHORD INTRO A/FILL TO A, INTRO B/FILL TO B, MAIN A, MAIN B, ENDING, SMALL ABC, ABC ON

METRONOME, TEMPO /+

START/STOP TAP, SYNCHRO, START/STOP

KEYBOARD PERCUSSION 8 Drum Kits (72 instruments in each Drum Kit)

REVERB HALL1, HALL2, ROOM1, ROOM2, ROOM3, STAGE1, STAGE2, PLATE, WHITE ROOM, TUNNEL, CANYON (CVP-79A only), BASEMENT

SONG PLAY, RECORD, GUIDE

SONG CONTROL r REW, f FF, o PAUSE

REGISTRATION MEMORY, BANK, 1 5, ABC FREEZE

LCD & DISPLAY 240 x 64 dots Liquid Crystal Display, CONTRAST, BEAT, FUNCTION, MIXER, PAGE , DISPLAY HOLD, 5 LCD Buttons, CONTROLS EXIT, Data Dial, /+

VOLUME MASTER VOLUME, ABC/SONG VOLUME

DEMO/HELP 25 demonstration tunes, 4 help languages (English, German, French, Japanese)

DISK DRIVE 3.5" 2DD or 2HD Micro Floppy Disk Drive

PEDAL RIGHT DAMPER CONTROLS

CENTER SOSTENUTO

LEFT Multi-function: SOFT, START/STOP, HARMONY ON/OFF, REGISTRATION+, INTRO A/FILL TO A, INTRO B/FILL TO B, ENDING/RIT., BREAK, SOSTENUTO (CVP-59S only)

JACKS PHONES x 2, AUX OUT R and L/L + R, AUX IN R and L/L+R, EXP PEDAL (CVP-79A only)

CONNECTORS MIDI IN/OUT/THRU MIDI IN/OUT

INPUT & OUTPUT AUX OUT: Output Impedance 600 LEVEL/IMPEDANCE AUX IN: Input Impedance 10 k / Input Sensitivity -10dBm

MAIN AMPLIFIERS 120 W (60 W x 2) 120 W (60 W x 2) 120 W (60 W x 2) 60 W (30 W x 2)

SPEAKERS (16 cm + 5 cm) x 2, 5 cm x 2 (16 cm + 5 cm) x 2, 5 cm x 2 (16 cm + 5 cm) x 2, 5 cm x 2 16 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2 (6-5/16" + 2") x 2, 2" x 2 (6-5/16" + 2") x 2, 2" x 2 (6-5/16" + 2") x 2, 2" x 2 6-5/16" x 2, 2" x 2

DIMENSIONS Music stand 1417 mm x 590 mm x 840 mm 1417 mm x 590 mm x 848 mm 1417 mm x 590 mm x 845 mm 1396 mm x 566 mm x 830 mm (W x D x H) down (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 33-1/16") (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 33-3/8") (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 33-1/4") (54-15/16" x 22-5/16" x 32-11/16")

Music stand 1417 mm x 590 mm x 1025 mm 1417 mm x 590 mm x 1019 mm 1417 mm x 590 mm x 1025 mm 1396 mm x 566 mm x 1003 mm up (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 40-3/8") (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 40-1/8") (55-13/16" x 23-1/4" x 40-3/8") (54-15/16" x 22-5/16" x 39-1/2")

WEIGHT 68.0 kg (149.9 lbs.) 71.5 kg (157.6 lbs.) 69.0 kg (152.1 lbs.) 65.5 kg (144.4 lbs.)

* Specifications subject to change without notice. * nderungen ohne Vorankndigung vorbehalten. * Sous toute rserve de modification des caractristiques sans pravis. * Especificaciones sujetas a cambios sin previo aviso.

136

CVP-79A: Assembly

We do not recommend attempting to assemble the Clavinova alone. The job can be easily accomplished, however, with only two people.

Use only the screws provided or replacements of exactly the speci- fied size. Using screws of the wrong size can result in damage to the instrument.

ZOpen the box and remove all the parts. On opening the box you should find the parts shown in the illustration above. Check to make sure that all the required parts are provided.

XCarefully lean the main unit against a wall. To make it easier to install the legs, place a soft blanket or similar material on the floor near a wall, close the Clavinova keyboard cover, place the front panel of the Clavinova (the side with the keyboard) on the blanket and gently lean the unit against the wall MAKING SURE THAT IT CAN NOT FALL as shown in the illustration.

CAttach the front legs. Securely attach the two front legs using three screws for each leg (use a Philips + screwdriver) as shown in the illustration. Make sure that the screws are firmly tightened.

1

CVP-79A: Zusammenbau

Wir raten Ihnen davon ab, das Clavinova alleine zusammenzu- bauen und aufzustellen. Zwei Personen knnen diese Arbeit jedoch problemlos ausfhren.

Verwenden Sie ausschlielich die mitgeliefenten Schrauben oder Ersatzschrauben identischer Gre. Die Verwendung von Schrau- ben mit abweichenden Maen kann eine Beschdigung des Instru- ments zur Folge haben.

ZDen Versandkarton ffnen und alle Teile auspacken. Der Karton sollte alle in der Abbildung gezeigten Teile enthalten. Vergewissern Sie sich, da alle Teile voll- zhlig vorhanden sind.

XDie Haupteineit vorsichtig an eine Wand leh- nen. Um das Anschrauben der Beine zu erleichtern, breiten Sie eine Decke oder ein weiches Tuch neben der Wand auf dem Boden aus, schlieen den Tastaturdeckel des Clavinova, stellen das Instrument mit der Vorderkante (Seite mit der Tastatur) vorsichtig auf die Decke und lehnen es an die Wand, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. VERGEWISSERN SIE SICH, DASS DAS IN- STRUMENT NICHT KIPPEN ODER WEG- RUTSCHEN KANN!

CDie vorderen Beine montieren. Schrauben Sie die beiden vorderen Beine mit jeweils drei Schrauben (Kreuzschlitzschraubendreher verwen- den!) gut am Clavinova fest, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. Ziehen Sie die Schrauben fest an.

5 x 20 mm screws x 28 Schrauben (5 x 20 mm) x 28 Vis de 5 x 20 mm x 28 Tornillos de 5 x 20 mm x 28

AC power cord Netzkabel Cordon dalimentation Cable de alimentacin de CA

137

Three screws on each side Drei Schrauben pro Bein Trois vis de chaque ct Tres tornillos en cada lado

2 3

CVP-79A: Montage

Nous ne vous conseillons pas dessayer dassembler le Clavinova seul. Toutefois, ce travail peut tre facilement excut par deux personnes.

Nutilisez que les vis fournies ou des vis ayant exactement les mmes dimensions. Lutilisation de vis de dimensions incorrectes pourrait endommager linstrument.

ZOuvrez le carton et retirez toutes les pices. Les pices indiques sur lillustration devraient toutes se trouver dans le carton. Vrifiez quil nen manque aucune.

XAppuyez le clavier contre un mur en faisant trs attention. Pour faciliter la pose des pieds, placez une couverture paisse, ou un matriau similaire, sur le plancher proximit dun mur. Fermez le cache-clavier et placez la face avant du Clavinova (ct clavier) sur la couver- ture et appuyez ensuite le clavier contre le mur de la manire illustre. ASSUREZ-VOUS QUIL NE PEUT PAS TOMBER.

CPosez les pieds avant. Fixez les deux pieds avant en utilisant trois vis par pied (utilisez un tournevis cruciforme +) comme illustr. Vrifiez que les vis sont serres fond.

CVP-79A: Montaje

No le recomendamos que monte la Clavinova usted solo. Sin embargo, el trabajo podr realizarse con ms facilidad entre dos personas solamente.

Emplee slo los tornillos suministrados u otros que sean exacta- mente del mismo tamao especificado. El empleo de tornillos del tamao errneo puede daar el instrumento.

ZAbra la caja y extraiga todas las partes. Al abrir la caja, encontrar las partes mostradas en la ilustracin de arriba. Compruebe y asegrese de que no falta ninguna de las partes requeridas.

X Incline con cuidado la unidad principal con- tra una pared. Para facilitar la instalacin de las patas, coloque una manta blanda o un material semejante sobre el piso cerca de una pared, cierre la cubierta del teclado de la Clavinova, coloque el panel frontal de la Clavinova (el lado con el teclado) sobre la manta e incline con cuida- do la unidad contra la pared ASEGURANDOSE DE QUE NO PUEDA CAERSE como se muestra en la ilustracin.

CColoque las patas delanteras. Fije las dos patas delanteras usando tres tornillos para cada pata (emplee un destornillador de cabeza en cruz +) como se muestra en la ilustracin. Asegrese de que los tornillos queden bien apretados.

Blanket, etc. Decke o. . Couverture, etc. Manta, etc.

138

VAttach the speaker box. Remove the speaker box cover (attached with Velcro) from the speaker box. Gently rest the speaker box onto the corresponding brackets on the front legs. (Be careful not to touch the speakers when handling the speaker box. Damage may result.) Make sure the speaker cord is extending out from the rear of the speaker box. Secure the speaker box to the main key- board unit using four screws on each side. Insert the speaker cord connector into the corresponding socket on the main keyboard unit, making sure that the pro- truding clip on the connector is facing left.

BAttach the pedal box assembly. Before attaching the rear leg and pedal box assembly, insert the pedal cord plug extending from the rear leg into the corresponding socket in the main unit. Make sure that the protruding clip on the connector is facing up. Put the excess cord into the leg and securely attach the rear leg and pedal assembly using 5 screws for each leg (three screws per leg and two screws on each leg bracket).

NSecure the speaker box. Stand the main unit on its legs and securely attach the speaker box to the bracket on the front legs using two screws for each bracket. If it is impossible to align the bracket holes with the speaker box holes, slightly loosen the three screws on each of the front legs, align the holes, and secure the speaker box. After the speaker box is firmly attached, retighten the screws on the front legs firmly. Put the speaker box cover back in place with the Velcro on the cover and speaker box. (Make sure the cut out corners of the speaker cover mask the brackets.)

4

VDen Lautsprecherkasten montieren. Nehmen Sie die von Klettband gehaltene Bespannung vom Lautsprecherkasten ab. Setzen Sie den Lautsprecherkasten vorsichtig auf die Halterungen an den vorderen Beinen. (Vermeiden Sie dabei unbedingt ein Berhren der Lautsprechermembrane.) Das Lautsprecherkabel mu an der Hinterseite (d.h. oben) aus dem Lautsprecherkasten ragen. Schrauben Sie den Lautsprecherkasten mit jeweils vier Schrauben an Vorder- und Hinterseite an der Haupteinheit fest. Schlieen Sie dann das Lautsprecherkabel an die Buchse der Haupteinheit an (die Fhrungsnase am Stecker mu dabei nach links weisen).

BDie Pedalkastengruppe montieren. Bevor Sie die Pedalkastengruppe mit den hinteren Bei- nen montieren, schlieen Sie das aus dem einen Bein ragende Pedalkabel an die entsprechende Buchse der Haupteinheit an (die Fhrungsnase am Stecker mu dabei nach oben weisen). Schieben Sie berlanges Kabel wieder in das Bein zurck, und schrauben Sie dann die Pedalkastengruppe mit fnf Schrauben pro Bein (jeweils 3 fr das Bein selbst und 2 fr die Halterung am Bein) an die Haupteinheit.

NDen Lautsprecherkasten an den vorderen Beinen sichern. Stellen Sie das Instrument nun auf seine Beine, um den Lautsprecherkasten zustzlich mit jeweils zwei Schrau- ben an die Halterungen der beiden vorderen Beine zu schrauben. Sollten die Schraubenbohrungen nicht zur Deckung gebracht werden knnen, lsen Sie die Befestigungsschrauben der vorderen Beine ein wenig. Nach Festschrauben des Lautsprecherkastens drfen Sie jedoch nicht vergessen, die Schrauben der Beine wieder fest anzuziehen. Bringen Sie nun die Bespannung wieder an, indem Sie die Klettband-Gegenstcke an Bespannungsrahmen und Lautsprecherkasten aufeinander ausrichten. (Die Halterungen mssen in den ausgesparten Mulden des Bespannungsrahmens zu liegen kommen.)

Four screws on each side

Jeweils vier Schrauben an Vorder- und Hinterseite

Quatre vis de chaque ct

Cuatro tornillos en cada lado

139

Five screws on each side Fnf Schrauben pro Bein Cinq vis de chaque ct Cinco tornillos en cada lado

65

VPosez la bote des haut-parleurs. Retirez le couvercle (fix au moyen de velcro) de la bote des haut-parleurs. Poser la bote des haut- parleurs sur les ferrures correspondantes des pieds avant. (Faites bien attention de ne pas toucher les haut- parleurs lorsque vous manipulez la bote. Cela pourrait les endommager.) Assurez-vous que le cordon des haut-parleurs sort de larrire de la bote. Fixez la bote sur le clavier en utilisant quatre vis de chaque ct. Branchez le connecteur du cordon des haut- parleurs la prise correspondante du clavier en veillant ce que la partie en saillie du connecteur soit dirige vers la gauche.

BFixez le pdalier. Avant de poser lensemble pied arrire/pdalier, bran- chez le connecteur du cordon de pdalier sortant du pied arrire la prise correspondante du clavier. Veillez ce que la partie en saillie du connecteur soit dirige vers le haut. Placez le cordon en excs dans le pied et fixer solidement lensemble pied arrire/pda- lier en utilisant 5 vis pour chaque pied (trois vis par pied et deux vis pour chaque ferrure de fixation).

NFixer la bote des haut-parleurs. Mettez le clavier sur ses pieds et fixez la bote des haut-parleurs la ferrure de fixation des pieds avant laide de deux vis par ferrure. Sil est impossible dali- gner les trous des ferrures de fixation sur les trous de la bote des haut-parleurs, desserrez lgrement les trois vis de chaque pied avant, alignez les trous et fixez la bote des haut-parleurs. Reposez le couvercle de la bote des haut-parleurs et fixez-le au moyen des velcros du couvercle et de la bote. (Assurez-vous que les coins dcoups du couvercle cachent bien les ferrures.)

VMonte la caja de altavoces. Extraiga la cubierta de la caja de altavoces (unida con cinta de adhesin por contacto) de la caja de altavoces. Apoye con cuidado la caja de altavoces en las mnsulas correspondientes de las patas delanteras. (Tenga cuidado en no tocar los altavoces cuando se manipule la caja de altavoces. Podran ocasionarse daos.) Asegrese de que el cable de altavoz se extienda desde la parte posterior de la caja del altavoz. Fije le caja de altavoces a la unidad del teclado principal usando cuatro tornillos en cada lado. Inserte el conector del cable de altavoces en el receptcu- lo correspondiente de la unidad del teclado principal, asegurndose de que el retenedor que sobresale del conector queda orientado hacia la izquierda.

BMonte el conjunto de la caja de pedales Antes de montar la pata trasera y el conjunto de la caja de pedales, inserte la clavija del cables de los pedales, que se extiende desde la pata trasera al receptculo correspondiente de la unidad principal. Asegrese de que el retenedor que sobresale del conector queda orientado hacia arriba. Ponga el cable sobrante en la pata y fije con seguridad la pata trasera y el conjunto de pedales usando 5 tornillos para cada pata (tres torni- llos por pata y dos tornillos en la mnsula de cada pata.

NFije la caja de altavoces Apoye la unidad principal sobre sus patas y monte con seguridad la caja de altavoces en la mnsula de las patas delanteras usando dos tornillos para cada mnsula. Si es imposible alinear los orificios de las mnsulas con los orificios de la caja de altavoces, afloje un poco los tres tornillos de cada una de las patas delanteras, alinee los orificios, y fije la caja de altavoces. Despus de haber montado firmemente la caja de altavoces, vuelva a apre- tar bien los tornillos de las patas delanteras. Ponga de nuevo la cubierta de la caja de altavoces en su lugar con la cinta de adhesin por contacto de la cubierta y de la caja de altavoces. (Asegrese de que las esquinas corta- das de la cubierta de altavoces encubre las mnsulas.)

Two screws on each side Jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts Deux vis de chaque ct Dos tornillos en cada lado

140

7

MDen Spannungswhler einstellen. Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen, mssen Sie den Spannungswhler (falls vorhanden) auf die rtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswhler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle Instrumente mit Spannungswhler auf 240 voreingestellt. Nachdem Sie den Spannungswhler richtig eingestellt haben, knnen Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen. In manchen Gebieten wird ein Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschlu an die evtl. unterschiedlich geformte Steckdose zu ermglichen.

<Die Pedalsttzen einstellen. Fr bessere Standfestigkeit sind unter der Pedalkasten- gruppe vier verstellbare Pedalsttzen vorgesehen. Nachdem Sie das Clavinova an seinem festen Stand- platz aufgestellt haben, drehen Sie diese Sttzen her- aus, bis sie fest auf dem Boden stehen. Die Sttzen sorgen beim Spielen fr przise Pedalbettigung. Wenn die vier Pedalsttzen nicht fest auf dem Boden aufste- hen, knnen Klangverzerrungen auftreten.

Vergewissern Sie sich nach Zusammenbau und Aufstellung des Clavinova noch einmal davon, da alle Schrauben fest angezogen sind.

Wenn das Instrument schief steht, komische Gerusche erzeugt oder sich beim Spielen wackelig anfhlt, prfen Sie gem den obigen Anweisungen, ob das Instrument richtig zusammengebaut wurde, und ziehen dabei die einzelnen Schrauben noch einmal nach.

MVoltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the set- ting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a minus screwdriver to rotate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected connect the AC power cord. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

<Set the Adjusters. For stability, four adjusters are provided on the bottom of the pedal box and rear leg assembly. After position- ing the Clavinova in its intended location, rotate the adjusters until they come in firm contact with the floor surface. The adjusters ensure stable pedal operation and facilitates pedal effect control. If the adjusters are not in firm contact with the floor surface, distorted sound may result.

After assembling the Clavinova, check once more to make sure that all screws have been securely fastened.

If the stand leans to the side, makes unusual noises, or otherwise seems unstable during use, check and tighten all screws while following the assembly instructions given above.

127

22 0

240

110

A voltage selector is provided in some areas.

Spannungswhler (nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten)

Un slecteur de tension est prvu pour certaines rgions

El selector de tensin est provisto para ciertos destinos.

141

MSlecteur de tension Avant de connecter le cordon dalimentation, vrifiez le rglage du slecteur de tension qui est prvu pour certaines rgions. Pour rgler le slecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis lame plate pour tourner le cadran du slecteur afin de mettre lindication correspondant la tension de votre rgion vis vis du repre triangulaire situ sur le panneau. Le slecteur de tension est rgl sur 240 V au dpart dusine. Une fois que vous avez rgl le slecteur de tension, connectez le cordon dalimentation. Un adaptateur de prise peut galement tre fourni dans certaines rgions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon la prise secteur mu- rale.

<Rglez la hauteur du pdalier. Pour assurer la stabilit, quatre dispositifs de rglage ont t prvus la partie infrieure de lensemble pda- lier/pied arrire. Aprs avoir plac le Clavinova len- droit o vous souhaitez linstaller, tournez ces disposi- tifs jusqu ce quils soient en contact ferme avec la surface du sol. Ces dispositifs assurent la stabilit du pdalier lors de son utilisation et facilitent la com- mande au pied des effets. Si ces dispositifs ne sont pas en contact ferme avec le sol, il pourra se produire une distorsion du son.

Aprs avoir assemble le Clavinova, vrifiez de nouveau que toutes les vis sont bien serres fond.

Si linstrument penche dun ct, sil fait un bruit inhabituel, ou sil parat instable lorsque vous lutilisez, vrifiez que vous lavez as- sembl correctement et que toutes les vis sont bien serres en suivant les instructions de montage donnes ici.

MSelector de tensin Antes de conectar el cable de alimentacin de CA, compruebe el ajuste del selector de tensin que se in- corpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V 240V de la red de alimentacin, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta - para girar el selector de modo que la tensin correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensin se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fbri- ca. Despus de haber seleccionado la tensin correcta, enchufe el cable de alimentacin. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse tambin un adaptador para adaptar la configuracin de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad.

<Ajuste los reguladores Para ms estabilidad, se proporcionan cuatro regulado- res en la parte inferior de la caja de pedales y en el conjunto de la pata trasera. Despus de situar la Clavinova en la posicin deseada, gire los reguladores hasta que hagan buen contacto con la superficie del piso. Los reguladores aseguran una operacin estable de los pedales y facilitan el control de los efectos con los pedales. Si los ajustadores no estn en buen con- tacto con la superficie del piso, el sonido podra distorsionarse.

Despus de haber montado la Clavinova, compruebe una vez ms que todos los tornillos se hayan apretado bien.

Si el soporte se inclina a un lado, hace ruidos anormales, o parece inestable durante la utilizacin, compruebe y apriete todos los tornillos siguiendo las instrucciones de montaje anteriores.

8

142

1

CVP-69/69A: Assembly

We do not recommend attempting to assemble the Clavinova alone. The job can be easily accomplished, however, with only two people.

Use only the screws provided or replacements of exactly the speci- fied size. Using screws of the wrong size can result in damage to the instrument.

ZOpen the box and remove all the parts. On opening the box you should find the parts shown in the illustration. Check to make sure that all the required parts are provided.

XAttach the feet (D) to the side panels (C). Secure the feet (D) to the side panels (C) using three 5 x 50 mm long gold-colored screws 1 for each side. Make sure the rounded edge of the side panels and the protruding end of the feet are facing front.

CAttach the speaker box (B) to the side pan- els (C). Remove the speaker box cover (attached with Velcro) from the speaker box. (Be careful not to touch the speakers when handling the speaker box. Damage may result.) Secure the speaker box (B) to the side panels (C), as shown in the illustration, using one 6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw 2 for each bottom bracket and two 4 x 20 mm (small round-head) screws 3 for each side bracket. Make sure the side brackets are positioned inside of the speaker box (as shown in the illustration) before securing.

CVP-69A/69: Zusammenbau

Wir raten Ihnen davon ab, das Clavinova alleine zusammenzu- bauen und aufzustellen. Zwei Personen knnen diese Arbeit jedoch problemlos ausfhren.

Verwenden Sie ausschlielich die mitgeliefenten Schrauben oder Ersatzschrauben identischer Gre. Die Verwendung von Schrau- ben mit abweichenden Maen kann eine Beschdigung des Instru- ments zur Folge haben.

ZDen Versandkarton ffnen und alle Teile auspacken. Der Karton sollte alle in der Abbildung gezeigten Teile enthalten. Vergewissern Sie sich, da alle Teile voll- zhlig vorhanden sind.

X Die Fe (D) an die Seitenwnde (C) schrauben. Schrauben Sie die beiden Fe (D) mit jeweils drei goldfarbenen Schrauben (5 x 50 mm) 1 an den Seitenwnden (C) fest. Die abgerundete Kante der Seitenwnde und das hervorspringende Ende der Fe mssen dabei nach vorne weisen.

CDen Lautsprecherkasten (B) mit den Seiten- wnden (C) verschrauben. Nehmen Sie die von Klettband gehaltene Bespannung vom Lautsprecherkasten ab. (Vermeiden Sie bei der Handhabung des Lautsprecherkastens unbedingt ein Berhren der Lautsprechermembrane, da diese leicht beschdigt werden.) Schrauben Sie nun den Lautsprecherkasten (B), wie in der Abbildung gezeigt, an den Seitenwnden (C) fest: Verwenden Sie jeweils eine Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm) 2 zum Befestigen an den beiden unteren Halterungen und jeweils zwei Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) 3 zum Verschrauben mit den beiden seitlichen Halterungen. Vergewissern Sie sich vor dem Eindrehen der Schrauben, da die Halterungen sich im Pedalkasten befinden (d.h. nicht sichtbar sind), wie in der Abbildung angedeutet.

5 x 50 mm long gold-colored screws x 6 Goldfarbene Schrauben (5 x 50 mm) x 6 Vis longues dores de 5 x 50 mm x 6 Tornillos dorados largos de 5 x 50 mm x 6

1

3

4 x 20 mm small round-head screws (black) x 8 Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) x 8 Petites vis tte ronde de 4 x 20 mm (noires) x 8 Tornillos pequeos de cabeza redonda (negros) de 4 x 20 mm x 8

6 x 20 mm large flat-head screws (black) x 8 Senkschrauben (6 x 20 mm) x 8 Grosses vis tte plate de 6 x 20 mm (noires) x 8 Tornillos grandes de cabeza plana (negros) de 6 x 20 mm x 8

2

A

B

D

C

C

E

D

AC power cord Netzkabel Cordon dalimentation Cable de alimentacin de CA

143

2 3

C

D

CVP-69/69A: Montage

Nous ne vous conseillons pas dessayer dassembler le Clavinova seul. Toutefois, ce travail peut tre facilement excut par deux personnes.

Nutilisez que les vis fournies ou des vis ayant exactement les mmes dimensions. Le fait dutiliser des vis de dimensions incor- rectes pourrait endommager linstrument.

ZOuvrez le carton et retirez toutes les pices. Les pices indiques sur lillustration devraient toutes se trouver dans le carton. Vrifiez quil nen manque aucune.

XMontez les supports infrieurs (D) sur les panneaux latraux (C) Fixez les supports infrieurs (D) aux panneaux latraux (C) en utilisant trois vis longues dores de 5 x 50 mm 1 de chaque ct. Veillez ce que le bord arrondi des panneaux latraux et la partie qui dpasse des supports infrieurs soient dirigs vers lavant.

CFixez la bote des haut-parleurs (B) aux pan- neaux latraux (C) Retirez le couvercle (fix au moyen de velcro) de la bote des haut-parleurs. (Faites bien attention de ne pas toucher les haut-parleurs lorsque vous manipulez la bote. Cela pourrait les endommager.) Fixez la bote des haut-parleurs (B) aux panneaux latraux (C) de la manire illustre en utilisant une grosse vis 2 de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) pour chaque ferrure infrieure et deux petites vis 3 de 4 x 20 mm ( tte ronde) pour chaque ferrure latrale. Assurez-vous que les ferrures latrales sont bien positionnes lintrieur de la bote des haut-parleurs (comme montr sur lillustration) avant de serrer les vis.

CVP-69/69A: Montaje

No le recomendamos que monte la Clavinova usted solo. Sin embargo, el trabajo podr realizarse con ms facilidad entre dos personas solamente.

Emplee slo los tornillos suministrados u otros que sean exacta- mente del mismo tamao especificado. El empleo de tornillos del tamao errneo puede daar el instrumento.

ZAbra la caja y extraiga todas las partes. Al abrir la caja, encontrar las partes mostradas en la ilustracin de arriba. Compruebe y asegrese de que no falta ninguna de las partes requeridas.

XMonte las patas (D) en los paneles laterales (C). Fije las patas (D) a los paneles laterales (C) usando tres tornillos durados largos de 5 x 50 mm 1 para cada lado. Asegrese de que el borde redondeado de los paneles laterales y el extremo que sobresale de los pies queden orientados hacia adelante.

CMonte la caja de altavoces (B) en los pane- les laterales (C). Extraiga la cubierta de la caja de altavoces (unida con cinta de adhesin por contacto) de la caja de altavoces. (Tenga cuidado en no tocar los altavoces cuando se manipule la caja de altavoces. Podran ocasionarse daos.) Fije le caja de altavoces (B) a los paneles late- rales (C), como se muestra en la ilustracin, usando un tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana) 2 para cada mnsula inferior y dos tornillos de 4 x 20 mm (pequeos de cabeza redonda) 3 para cada mnsula lateral. Asegrese de que las mnsulas laterales que- den situadas dentro de la caja de altavoces (como se muestra en la ilustracin) antes de la fijacin.

B

B

C

3

2

4 x 20 mm (small round-head) screws Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) Petites vis de 4 x 20 mm ( tte ronde) Tornillos de 4 x 20 mm (pequeos de cabeza redonda)

6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm)

Grosses vis de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) Tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana)

1

5 x 50 mm long gold-colored screws Goldfarbene Schrauben (5 x 50 mm) Vis longues dores de 5 x 50 mm Tornillos dorados largos de 5 x 50 mm

144

VAttach the pedal box (E) to the speaker box (B). Secure the pedal box (E) to the speaker box (B) using one 6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw 2 for each bottom bracket and two 4 x 20 mm (small round-head) screws 3 for each rear bracket. Make sure that the pedal cord passes through the recess in the top of the pedal assembly and the speaker cord is extending out to the rear from the top of the speaker box (see illustra- tion).

BAttach the main keyboard unit (A). (Part 1) Gently lower the main keyboard unit (A) onto the speaker box (B) and stand assembly so that the rear of the main unit is positioned about 10cm behind the back of the side panel. WATCH YOUR FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!! Insert one 6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw 2 into the innermost hole leaving about 1cm of the screw protruding on each side of the main units bottom panel. These screws will slide into the rear side-panel brackets in step 6.

* Keep your fingers away from the area marked Danger Zone in the illustrations when lowering the main keyboard unit onto the stand assembly.

VDen Pedalkasten (E) am Lautsprecherkasten (B) festschrauben. Schrauben Sie den Pedalkasten mit jeweils einer Senk- schraube (6 x 20 mm) 2 fr die beiden unteren Halterungen und zwei Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) 3 fr die beiden hinteren Halterungen an den Lautsprecherkasten (B). Achten Sie dabei darauf, da das Pedalkabel oben aus dem einen Bein des Pedal- kastens ragt und das Lautsprecherkabel nach hinten gelegt ist, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt.

BDie Haupteinheit (A) montieren. (Teil 1) Setzen Sie die Haupteinheit (A) vorsichtig so auf den Lautsprecherkasten und die Seitenwnde, da ihre Hinterseite etwa 10 cm ber den Hinterkanten der Seitenwnde bersteht. VORSICHT! KLEMMEN SIE SICH DABEI NICHT DIE FINGER EIN! Dre- hen Sie hinten an der Unterseite der Haupteinheit links und rechts jeweils eine Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm) 2 in die innere Bohrung, so da noch etwa 1 cm Gewinde hervorsteht. Diese Schrauben greifen in Schritt 6 in die hinteren Halterungen der Seitenwnde.

* Halten Sie beim Aufsetzen der Haupteinheit auf die Stnder- baugruppe von dem in der Abbildung mit Gefahrenzone ge- kennzeichneten Bereich fern.

4

B

C

3

2

4 x 20 mm (small round-head) screws Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) Petites vis de 4 x 20 mm ( tte ronde) Tornillos de 4 x 20 mm (pequeos de cabeza redonda)

6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm) Grosses vis de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) Tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana)

145

5

A

B

A

C

VFixez le pdalier (E) la bote des haut- parleurs (B). Fixez le pdalier (E) la bote des haut-parleurs (B) en utilisant une grosse vis 2 de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) pour chaque ferrure infrieure et deux petites vis 3 de 4 x 20 mm ( tte ronde) pour chaque ferrure arrire. Assurez-vous que le cordon du pdalier passe dans la dcoupe la partie suprieure du pdalier et que le cordon des haut-parleurs sort vers larrire de la bote des haut-parleurs (voir lillustration).

BPosez le clavier (A) (1re tape) Abaissez le clavier (A) avec prcaution sur la bote des haut-parleurs (B) et sur les supports de manire que larrire du clavier dpasse de 10 cm environ derrire les panneaux latraux. FAITES ATTENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE OPERATION !! Mettez une vis 2 de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) dans le trou le plus lintrieur de chaque ct du clavier de manire que ces vis sortent denviron 1 cm du panneau infrieur. Ces vis se glisseront dans les ferrures arrire des panneaux latraux au cours de ltape 6.

* Lorsque vous abaissez le clavier sur son support, ne placez pas les mains dans les zones marques Zones dangereuses sur lillustration.

VMonte la caja de pedales (E) en la caja de altavoces (B). Fije la caja de pedales (E) a la caja de altavoces (B) usando un tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana) 2 para cada mnsula inferior y dos tornillos de 4 x 20 mm (pequeos de cabeza redonda) 3 para cada mnsula trasera. Asegrese de que el cable de los pe- dales pasa por el hueco de la parte superior del conjun- to de pedales y que el cable de altavoces sale por la parte posterior de encima de la caja de altavoces (vea la ilustracin).

BMonte la unidad del teclado principal (A). (Parte 1) Baje con cuidado la unidad del teclado principal (A) a la caja de altavoces (B) y conjunto del soporte de modo que la parte posterior de la unidad principal quede si- tuada a unos 10 cm detrs de la parte posterior del pa- nel lateral. CUANDO LO HAGA, TENGA CUI- DADO CON LOS DEDOS! Inserte un tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana) 2 en el orificio ms interior dejando aproximadamente 1 cm del tornillo sobresaliendo en cada lado del panel inferior de la uni- dad principal. Estos tornillos se deslizarn a las mnsulas del panel lateral trasero en el paso 6.

* Mantenga apartados los dedos de la parte marcada con Zona peligrosa en las ilustraciones cuando baje la unidad del tecla- do principal al conjunto del soporte.

Danger Zone Gefahrenzone Zones dangereuses Zona peligrosa

6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm) Grosses vis de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) Tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana)

2

10 cm behind the side panel 10 cm berstand 10 cm derrire le panneau latral 10 cm detrs del panel lateral

146

6

NAttach the main keyboard unit. (Part 2) With the protruding screw heads on the bottom panel of the main unit positioned behind the side-panel rear brackets, slide the main keyboard unit forward until the screw heads stop against the end of the slot in the rear brackets. Align the holes in the bottom of the main unit with those in the front side-panel brackets (also center the main unit to produce an equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustrations), then se- cure the main keyboard unit to the stand assembly us- ing two 6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screws 2 screwed through the front bracket and then firmly tightening the two protruding screws that slid into the rear brackets. Put the speaker box cover back in place with the Velcro on the cover and speaker box. (Make sure that the upper edge of the cover fits snugly against the un- der side of the main unit.)

MConnect the speaker cord and pedal cord. Insert the speaker cord connector into the correspond- ing socket on the right (closest to the pedal box) of the keyboard unit. Plug the pedal cord connector into the socket on the left (farthest from the pedal box) of the keyboard unit. Note that both connectors must be in- serted with the protruding clip facing the rear of the main unit.

NDie Haupteinheit montieren. (Teil 2) Positionieren Sie die Haupteinheit so auf der Stnder- baugruppe, da die beiden eingedrehten Schrauben hinter den hinteren Halterungen an den Seitenwnden zu liegen kommen, und schieben Sie dann nach vorn, bis die Schrauben bis zum Anschlag in den Halterungsschlitzen sitzen. Bringen Sie die Bohrungen der vorderen Halterungen mit denen an der Unterseite der Haupteinheit zur Deckung (achten Sie auch darauf, da die Haupteinheit mittig positioniert ist, d.h. links und rechts gleichviel bersteht, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt), und schrauben Sie die Haupteinheit dann mit zwei weiteren Senkschrauben (6 x 20 mm) 2 an den vorderen Halterungen fest, um danach die beiden be- reits eingedrehten Schrauben fest anzuziehen. Bringen Sie nun die Bespannung wieder an, indem Sie die Klettband-Gegenstcke an Bespannungsrahmen und Lautsprecherkasten aufeinander ausrichten. (Die Ober- kante des Bespannungsrahmens mu bndig an der Unterseite der Haupteinheit anliegen.)

MDas Lautsprecherkabel und das Pedalkabel anschlieen. Schlieen Sie das Lautsprecherkabel an die rechte (dem Pedalkasten am nchsten gelegene) Buchse an an der Unterseite der Haupteinheit an. Das Pedalkabel schlieen Sie an die linke (am weitesten vom Pedal- kasten entfernte) Buchse an. Die beiden Stecker ms- sen mit der Fhrungsnase in Richtung Rckseite (der Haupteinheit) in die jeweilige Buchse gesteckt werden.

A

A

CA

2

6 x 20 mm (large flat-head) screw Senkschraube (6 x 20 mm) Grosses vis de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) Tornillo de 6 x 20 mm (grande de cabeza plana)

147

7

NPosez le clavier (A) (2re tape) Les ttes de vis sortant du panneau infrieur du clavier tant positionnes derrire les ferrures arrires des pan- neaux latraux, faites glisser le clavier vers lavant jusqu ce que les ttes de vis soient en bute contre le fond de la fente des ferrures arrire. Alignez les trous du panneau infrieur du clavier sur les trous des ferru- res avant des panneaux latraux (centrez galement le clavier de manire avoir un jeu identique de chaque ct, comme illustr). Fixez ensuite le clavier sur le support en vissant une grosse vis 2 de 6 x 20 mm ( tte plate) travers chaque ferrure avant et en serrant fond les deux vis glisses dans les ferrures arrire. Re- posez le couvercle de la bote des haut-parleurs et fixez-le au moyen des velcros du couvercle et de la bote. (Assurez-vous que le bord suprieur du couver- cle est bien cal contre le panneau infrieur du clavier.)

MConnectez le cordon des haut-parleurs et le cordon du pdalier. Branchez le connecteur du cordon des haut-parleurs la prise correspondante sur le ct droit du clavier (la plus proche du pdalier). Branchez le connecteur du cordon du pdalier la prise situe sur le ct gauche du clavier (la plus loigne du pdalier). Veuillez noter que les deux connecteurs doivent tre branchs avec la partie en saillie dirige vers larrire du clavier.

NMonte la unidad del teclado principal. (Parte 2) Con las cabezas de tornillos sobresaliendo por el panel inferior de la unidad principal situado detrs de las mnsulas traseras del panel lateral, deslice la unidad del teclado principal hacia adelante hasta que las cabe- zas de tornillos topen contra el extremo de la ranura de las mnsulas traseras. Alinee los orificios de la parte inferior de la unidad principal con los de las mnsulas del panel lateral frontal (centre tambin la unidad prin- cipal para producir una holgura igual en los lados iz- quierdo y derecho, como se muestra en las ilustracio- nes), y fije entonces la unidad del teclado principal en el conjunto del soporte usando dos tornillos de 6 x 20 mm (grandes de cabeza plana) 2 enroscados por la mnsula frontal y apriete entonces bien los tornillos que sobresalen que se incorporan en las mnsulas trase- ras. Ponga de nuevo la cubierta de la caja de altavoces en su lugar con la cinta de adhesin por contacto de la cubierta y de la caja de altavoces. (Asegrese de que el borde superior de la cubierta se adapta bien contra el lado inferior de la unidad principal.)

MConecte el cable de altavoces y el cable de pedales. Inserte el conector del cable de altavoces en el recept- culo correspondiente de la derecha (ms cercano a la caja de pedales) de la unidad del teclado. Enchufe el conector del cable de pedales en el receptculo de la izquierda (el ms apartado de la caja de pedales) de la unidad del teclado. Tenga presente que ambos conectores deben insertarse con el retenedor saliente orientado a la parte trasera de la unidad principal.

148

8

<Voltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the set- ting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a minus screwdriver to ro- tate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected connect the AC power cord. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

>Be sure to set the pedal adjusters. For stability, two adjusters are provided on the bottom of the pedal assembly (E). Rotate the adjusters until they comes in firm contact with the floor surface. The adjusters ensure stable pedal operation and facilitate pedal effect control. If the adjusters are not in firm contact with the floor surface, distorted sound may result.

After assembling the Clavinova, check once more to make sure that all screws have been securely fastened.

If the stand leans to the side, makes unusual noises, or otherwise seems unstable during use, check and tighten all screws while following the assembly instructions given above.

<Den Spannungswhler einstellen. Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen, mssen Sie den Spannungswhler (falls vorhanden) auf die rtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswhler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle Instrumente mit Spannungswhler auf 240 voreingestellt. Nachdem Sie den Spannungswhler richtig eingestellt haben, knnen Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen. In manchen Gebieten wird ein Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschlu an die evtl. unterschiedlich geformte Steckdose zu ermglichen.

>Die Pedalsttzen einstellen. Fr bessere Standfestigkeit sind unter dem Pedalkasten (E) zwei verstellbare Pedalsttzen vorgesehen. Nach- dem Sie das Clavinova an seinem festen Standplatz aufgestellt haben, drehen Sie diese Sttzen heraus, bis sie fest auf dem Boden stehen. Die Sttzen sorgen beim Spielen fr przise Pedalbettigung. Wenn die beiden Pedalsttzen nicht fest auf dem Boden aufste- hen, knnen Klangverzerrungen auftreten.

Vergewissern Sie sich nach Zusammenbau und Aufstellung des Clavinova noch einmal davon, da alle Schrauben fest angezogen sind.

Wenn das Instrument schief steht, komische Gerusche erzeugt oder sich beim Spielen wackelig anfhlt, prfen Sie gem den obigen Anweisungen, ob das Instrument richtig zusammengebaut wurde, und ziehen dabei die einzelnen Schrauben noch einmal nach.

240

127

110 22 0

A voltage selector is provided in some areas.

Spannungswhler (nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten)

Un slecteur de tension est prvu pour certaines rgions

El selector de tensin est provisto para ciertos destinos.

149

<Slecteur de tension Avant de connecter le cordon dalimentation, vrifiez le rglage du slecteur de tension qui est prvu pour certaines rgions. Pour rgler le slecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis lame plate pour tourner le cadran du slecteur afin de mettre lindication correspondant la tension de votre rgion vis vis du repre triangulaire situ sur le panneau. Le slecteur de tension est rgl sur 240 V au dpart dusine. Une fois que vous avez rgl le slecteur de tension, connectez le cordon dalimentation. Un adaptateur de prise peut galement tre fourni dans certaines rgions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon la prise secteur mu- rale.

>Noubliez pas de rgler la hauteur du pda- lier. Pour assurer la stabilit, deux dispositifs de rglage ont t prvus la partie infrieure du pdalier (E). Tour- nez ces dispositifs jusqu ce quils soient en contact ferme avec la surface du sol. Ces dispositifs assurent la stabilit du pdalier lors de son utilisation et facili- tent la commande au pied des effets. Si ces dispositifs ne sont pas en contact ferme avec le sol, il pourra se produire une distorsion du son.

Aprs avoir assemble le Clavinova, vrifiez de nouveau que toutes les vis sont bien serres fond.

Si linstrument penche dun ct, sil fait un bruit inhabituel, ou sil parat instable lorsque vous lutilisez, vrifiez que vous lavez as- sembl correctement et que toutes les vis sont bien serres en suivant les instructions de montage donnes ici.

<Selector de tensin Antes de conectar el cable de alimentacin de CA, compruebe el ajuste del selector de tensin que se in- corpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V 240V de la red de alimentacin, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta para girar el selector de modo que la tensin correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensin se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fbri- ca. Despus de haber seleccionado la tensin correcta, enchufe el cable de alimentacin. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse tambin un adaptador para adaptar la configuracin de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad.

>Asegrese de ajustar los reguladores de los pedales. Para ms estabilidad, se proporcionan dos reguladores en la parte inferior del conjunto de pedales (E). Gire los reguladores hasta que hagan buen contacto con la superficie del piso. Los reguladores aseguran una ope- racin estable de los pedales y facilitan el control de los efectos con los pedales. Si los ajustadores no estn en buen contacto con la superficie del piso, el sonido podra distorsionarse.

Despus de haber montado la Clavinova, compruebe una vez ms que todos los tornillos se hayan apretado bien.

Si el soporte se inclina a un lado, hace ruidos anormales, o parece inestable durante la utilizacin, compruebe y apriete todos los tornillos siguiendo las instrucciones de montaje anteriores.

9

E

150

1

CVP-59S: Assembly

We do not recommend attempting to assemble the Clavinova alone. The job can be easily accomplished, however, with only two people.

Use only the screws provided or replacements of exactly the speci- fied size. Using screws of the wrong size can result in damage to the instrument.

ZOpen the box and remove all the parts. On opening the box you should find the parts shown in the illustration above. Check to make sure that all the required parts are provided.

XAttach the side panels (D) to the pedal box (C). Before installing the pedal box, untie and straighten out the bundled cord attached to the bottom of the pedal box. Place the pedal box on top of the wooden blocks at- tached to the side panels (D), and attach using the four 6 x 25 mm round-head screws 1 two screws on each side. Make sure the pedals extend in the same direction as the feet.

CAttach the center panel (B) to the side pan- els (D). The center panel (B) should be screwed to the vertical brackets on the side panels (D) using the four 4 x 20 mm round-head screws 2, as shown in the illustration. Make sure the center panel is attached to the side of the brackets facing the pedals.

CVP-59S: Zusammenbau

Wir raten Ihnen davon ab, das Clavinova alleine zusammenzu- bauen und aufzustellen. Zwei Personen knnen diese Arbeit jedoch problemlos ausfhren.

Verwenden Sie ausschlielich die mitgeliefenten Schrauben oder Ersatzschrauben identischer Gre. Die Verwendung von Schrau- ben mit abweichenden Maen kann eine Beschdigung des Instru- ments zur Folge haben.

ZDen Versandkarton ffnen und alle Teile auspacken. Der Karton sollte alle in der Abbildung gezeigten Teile enthalten. Vergewissern Sie sich, da alle Teile voll- zhlig vorhanden sind.

XDie Seitenwnde (D) mit dem Pedalkasten (C) verschrauben. Bevor Sie den Pedalkasten festschrauben, lsen Sie zunchst das an der Unterseite des Pedalkastens befe- stigte Kabel und ziehen es gerade. Setzen Sie den Pedalkasten auf die Holzkltze an den Innenseiten der Seitenwnde (D), um ihn dann mit den vier greren Rundkopfschrauben (6 x 25 mm) 1 festzuschrauben (jeweils zwei Schrauben links und rechts). Achten Sie darauf, da die Pedale und die Fe in dieselbe Richtung weisen.

CDie Rckwand (B) an die beiden Seiten- wnde (D) schrauben. Die Rckwand wird an den beiden senkrecht ange- brachten Halterungen mit den vier kleineren Rundkopf- schrauben (4 x 20 mm) 2 festgeschraubt, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt. Achten Sie darauf, da die Rck- wand vor den Halterungen angesetzt und fest- geschraubt wird.

D

C

B

A

AC power cord Netzkabel Cordon dalimentation Cable de alimentacin de CA

Bundled pedal cord inside Gebndeltes Pedalkabel

Cordon de pdalier enroul lintrieur Cable de pedales enrollado en el interior

4 x 20 mm round-head screws x4 Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) x 4 Vis tte ronde de 4 x 20 mm x 4 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm x 4

6 x 18 mm flat-head screws x6 Senkschrauben (6 x 18 mm) x 6 Vis tte plate de 6 x 18 mm x 6 Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 18 mm x 6

6 x 25 mm round-head screws x4 Rundkopfschrauben (6 x 25 mm) x 4 Vis tte ronde de 6 x 25 mm x 4 Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm x 4

1

2

3

151

2 3

D

C

D

C

B

CVP-59S: Montage

Nous ne vous conseillons pas dessayer dassembler le Clavinova seul. Toutefois, ce travail peut tre facilement excut par deux personnes.

Nutilisez que les vis fournies ou des vis ayant exactement les mmes dimensions. Le fait dutiliser des vis de dimensions incor- rectes pourrait endommager linstrument.

ZOuvrez le carton et retirez toutes les pices. Les pices indiques sur lillustration devraient toutes se trouver dans le carton. Vrifiez quil nen manque aucune.

XFixez les panneaux latraux (D) au pdalier (C) Avant de poser le pdalier, dtachez le cordon de la partie infrieure du pdalier et droulez-le. Placez le pdalier sur les cales en bois fixes aux pan- neaux latraux (D) et fixez-le en utilisant les quatre vis tte ronde 1 de 6 x 25 mm : deux vis de chaque ct. Veillez ce que les pdales et la partie qui d- passe des supports infrieurs soient diriges dans le mme sens.

CFixez le panneau central (B) aux panneaux latraux (D) Le panneau central (B) doit tre fix aux ferrures verti- cales des panneaux latraux (D) laide des quatre vis tte ronde 2 de 4 x 20 mm, comme illustr. Assu- rez-vous que le panneau central est fix sur le ct des ferrures dirig vers le pdalier

CVP-59S: Montaje

No le recomendamos que monte la Clavinova usted solo. Sin embargo, el trabajo podr realizarse con ms facilidad entre dos personas solamente.

Emplee slo los tornillos suministrados u otros que sean exacta- mente del mismo tamao especificado. El empleo de tornillos del tamao errneo puede daar el instrumento.

ZAbra la caja y extraiga todas las partes. Al abrir la caja, encontrar las partes mostradas en la ilustracin de arriba. Compruebe y asegrese de que no falta ninguna de las partes requeridas.

XMonte los paneles laterales (D) en la caja de pedales (C). Antes de instalar la caja de pedales, desate y alargue el cable enrollado unido a la parte inferior de la caja de pedales. Coloque la caja de pedales encima de bloques de ma- dera colocados en los paneles laterales (D), y una usan- do los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm 1; dos tornillos en cada lado. Asegrese de que los pedales se extienden en la misma direccin que las patas.

CMonte el panel central (B) en los paneles laterales (D). El panel central (B) debe enroscarse a las mnsulas verticales de los paneles laterales (D) usando los cuatro tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm 2, como se muestra en la ilustracin. Asegrese de que el panel central queda unido al lado de las mnsulas orientado a los pedales.

6 x 25 mm round-head screws Rundkopfschrauben (6 x 25 mm) Vis tte ronde de 6 x 25 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 6 x 25 mm x 4

1

2

4 x 20 mm round-head screws Rundkopfschrauben (4 x 20 mm) Vis tte ronde de 4 x 20 mm Tornillos de cabeza redonda de 4 x 20 mm x 4

152

4

V Install the main unit (A). Gently place the main unit (A) on the side panels (D) with the screws on its bottom panel (toward the rear of the main unit) just in front of the grooves in the brack- ets located at the top of the side panels. Then slide the main unit to the rear until it stops. WATCH YOUR FINGERS WHEN DOING THIS!! Align the holes on the bottom panel of the main unit with the holes in the brackets on the side panels (also center the main unit to produce an equal clearance on the left and right sides, as shown in the illustration), then screw in and securely tighten the six 6 x 18mm flat-head screws 3 (three screws for each side of the main unit).

* Keep your fingers away from the area marked Danger Zone in the illustrations when lowering the main keyboard unit onto the stand assembly.

BConnect the pedal cord. Pass the pedal cord through the two cord holders on the side panel. Insert the connector on the free end of the cord into the corresponding socket on the underside of the main unit. Make sure that the protruding clip on the connector is facing the rear of the main unit. Close the clips of the two cord holders to keep the cord firmly in place.

VDie Haupteinheit (A) montieren. Setzen Sie die Haupteinheit (A) vorsichtig so auf die Seitenwnde (D), da die Schrauben an ihrer Unter- seite (hinten) vor den oberen Halterungen an den Seitenwnden zu liegen kommen. Schieben Sie die Haupteinheit dann nach hinten, bis die Schrauben bis zum Anschlag in den Halterungsschlitzen sitzen. VOR- SICHT! KLEMMEN SIE SICH DABEI NICHT DIE FINGER EIN! Bringen Sie nun die Bohrungen in den beiden seitli- chen Halterungen mit den Bohrungen an der Unterseite der Haupteinheit zur Deckung (achten Sie auch darauf, da die Haupteinheit mittig positioniert ist, d.h. links und rechts gleichviel bersteht, wie in der Abbildung gezeigt), und schrauben Sie die Haupteinheit dann mit den sechs Senkschrauben (6 x 18 mm) 3 fest (jeweils drei Schrauben links und rechts).

* Halten Sie beim Aufsetzen der Haupteinheit auf die Stnder- baugruppe von dem in der Abbildung mit Gefahrenzone ge- kennzeichneten Bereich fern.

BDas Pedalkabel anschlieen. Fhren Sie das Pedalkabel durch die beiden Kabelhalter an der Seitenwand. Schlieen Sie das Ka- bel danach an die Buchse auf der Unterseite der Haupt- einheit an. Der Stecker mu mit der Fhrungsnase in Richtung Rckseite (der Haupteinheit) in die Buchse gesteckt werden. Drcken Sie nun noch die Klemmen der Kabelhalter fest an, damit das Kabel sicher gehal- ten wird.

A

Danger Zone Gefahrenzone Zones dangereuses Zona peligrosa

D

A

A

D

6 x 18 mm flat-head screws Senkschrauben (6 x 18 mm) Vis tte plate de 6 x 18 mm Tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 18 mm

3

153

5

Cord holder Kabelhalter Support de cordon Soporte de cable

A

A

D

C

VPosez le clavier (A) Placez le clavier (A) sur les panneaux latraux (D), avec les vis de son panneau infrieur (situes vers lar- rire du clavier) places immdiatement derrire les fentes des ferrures situes la partie suprieure des panneaux latraux (D), puis faites glisser le clavier vers lavant jusqu ce quil vienne en bute. FAITES AT- TENTION A VOS DOIGTS EN EXECUTANT CETTE OPERATION !! Alignez les trous du panneau infrieur du clavier sur les trous des ferrures des panneaux latraux (centrez galement le clavier de manire avoir un jeu identi- que de chaque ct comme montr sur lillustration) puis posez et serrez fond les six vis tte plate 3 de 6 x 18 mm (trois vis de chaque ct du clavier).

* Lorsque vous abaissez le clavier sur son support, ne placez pas les mains dans les zones marques Zones dangereuses sur lillustration.

BConnectez le cordon du pdalier Faites passer le cordon du pdalier dans les deux sup- ports de cordon situs sur le panneau latral. La prise doit tre branche au connecteur correspondant situ la partie infrieure du clavier. Assurez-vous que la partie en saillie de la prise est dirige vers larrire du clavier. Fermez soigneusement les deux supports pour maintenir le cordon bien en place.

VMonte la unidad principal (A). Coloque con cuidado la unidad principal (A) en los paneles laterales (D) con los tornillos de su panel infe- rior (hacia la parte trasera de la unidad principal) junto delante de las ranuras situadas en la parte superior de los paneles laterales. Entonces, deslice la unidad prin- cipal hacia atrs hasta que haga tope. CUANDO LO HAGA, TENGA CUIDADO CON LOS DEDOS! Alinee los orificios del panel inferior de la unidad prin- cipal con los de las mnsulas de los paneles laterales (centre tambin la unidad principal para producir una holgura igual en los lados izquierdo y derecho, como se muestra en la ilustracin), y entonces enrosque y aprie- te bien los seis tornillos de cabeza plana de 6 x 18 mm 3 (tres tornillos para cada lado de la unidad principal).

* Mantenga apartados los dedos de la parte marcada con Zona peligrosa en las ilustraciones cuando baje la unidad del tecla- do principal al conjunto del soporte.

BConecte el cable de pedales. Pase el cable de pedales por los dos soportes de cable del panel lateral. Inserte el conector del extremo libre del cable en el receptculo correspondiente de la parte inferior de la unidad principal. Asegrese de que el conector deben insertarse con el retenedor saliente orientado a la parte trasera de la unidad principal.

154

6

NVoltage Selector Before connecting the AC power cord, check the set- ting of the voltage selector which is provided in some areas. To set the selector for 110V, 127V, 220V or 240V main voltages, use a minus screwdriver to ro- tate the selector dial so that the correct voltage for your region appears next to the pointer on the panel. The voltage selector is set at 240V when the unit is initially shipped. After the proper voltage has been selected connect the AC power cord. A plug adaptor may be also provided in some areas to match the pin configuration of the AC wall outlets in your area.

MSet the adjuster. For stability, an adjuster is provided on the bottom of the pedal box (C). Rotate the adjuster until it comes in firm contact with the floor surface. The adjuster en- sures stable pedal operation and facilitates pedal effect control. If the adjuster is not in firm contact with the floor surface, distorted sound may result.

After assembling the Clavinova, check once more to make sure that all screws have been securely fastened.

If the stand leans to the side, makes unusual noises, or otherwise seems unstable during use, check and tighten all screws while following the assembly instructions given above.

NDen Spannungswhler einstellen. Bevor Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen, mssen Sie den Spannungswhler (falls vorhanden) auf die rtliche Netzspannung einstellen. Zum Verstellen drehen Sie den Spannungswhler mit einem Schlitzschraubendreher, bis der richtige Spannungswert (110, 127, 220 oder 240) an der Pfeilmarkierung steht. Bei der Auslieferung werden alle Instrumente mit Spannungswhler auf 240 voreingestellt. Nachdem Sie den Spannungswhler richtig eingestellt haben, knnen Sie nun das Netzkabel anschlieen. In manchen Gebieten wird ein Steckerdapter mitgeliefert, um den Anschlu an die evtl. unterschiedlich geformte Steckdose zu ermglichen.

MDie Pedalsttze einstellen. Fr bessere Standfestigkeit ist unter dem Pedalkasten (C) eine verstellbare Pedalsttze vorgesehen. Nachdem Sie das Clavinova an seinem festen Standplatz aufge- stellt haben, drehen Sie diese Sttze heraus, bis sie fest auf dem Boden steht. Die Sttze sorgt beim Spielen fr przise Pedalbettigung. Wenn die Pedalsttze nicht fest auf dem Boden aufsteht, knnen Klangverzerrungen auftreten.

Vergewissern Sie sich nach Zusammenbau und Aufstellung des Clavinova noch einmal davon, da alle Schrauben fest angezogen sind.

Wenn das Instrument schief steht, komische Gerusche erzeugt oder sich beim Spielen wackelig anfhlt, prfen Sie gem den obigen Anweisungen, ob das Instrument richtig zusammengebaut wurde, und ziehen dabei die einzelnen Schrauben noch einmal nach.

240

127

110 22 0

A A voltage selector is provided in some areas.

Spannungswhler (nur in bestimmten Verkaufsgebieten)

Un slecteur de tension est prvu pour certaines rgions

El selector de tensin est provisto para ciertos destinos.

155

NSlecteur de tension Avant de connecter le cordon dalimentation, vrifiez le rglage du slecteur de tension qui est prvu pour certaines rgions. Pour rgler le slecteur sur 110 V, 127 V, 220 V ou 240 V, utilisez un tournevis lame plate pour tourner le cadran du slecteur afin de mettre lindication correspondant la tension de votre rgion vis vis du repre triangulaire situ sur le panneau. Le slecteur de tension est rgl sur 240 V au dpart dusine. Une fois que vous avez rgl le slecteur de tension, connectez le cordon dalimentation. Un adaptateur de prise peut galement tre fourni dans certaines rgions pour pouvoir brancher le cordon la prise secteur mu- rale.

MRglez la hauteur du pdalier Pour assurer la stabilit, un dispositif de rglage a t prvu la partie infrieure du pdalier (C). Tournez ce dispositif jusqu ce quil soit en contact ferme avec la surface du sol. Ce dispositif assure la stabilit du pda- lier lors de son utilisation et facilitent la commande au pied des effets. Si ce dispositif nest pas en contact ferme avec le sol, il pourra se produire une distorsion du son.

Aprs avoir mont le Clavinova, vrifiez de nouveau que toutes les vis sont bien serres fond.

Si linstrument penche dun ct, sil fait un bruit inhabituel, ou sil parat instable lorsque vous lutilisez, vrifiez que vous lavez as- sembl correctement et que toutes les vis sont bien serres en suivant les instructions de montage donnes ici.

NSelector de tensin Antes de conectar el cable de alimentacin de CA, compruebe el ajuste del selector de tensin que se in- corpora para ciertos destinos. Para ajustar el selector a 110V, 127V, 220V 240V de la red de alimentacin, emplee un destornillador de cabeza recta - para girar el selector de modo que la tensin correcta de su zona aparezca al lado del indicador del panel. El selector de tensin se ajusta a 240V cuando la unidad sale de fbri- ca. Despus de haber seleccionado la tensin correcta, enchufe el cable de alimentacin. En algunas zonas puede suministrarse tambin un adaptador para adaptar la configuracin de las patillas de los tomacorrientes de CA de su localidad.

MAjuste los reguladores. Para ms estabilidad, se proporciona un regulador en la parte inferior de la caja de pedales (C). Gire el regula- dor hasta que haga buen contacto con la superficie del piso. El regulador asegura una operacin estable de los pedales y facilita el control de los efectos con los peda- les. Si el ajustador no est en buen contacto con la superficie del piso, el sonido podra distorsionarse.

Despus de haber montado la Clavinova, compruebe una vez ms que todos los tornillos se hayan apretado bien.

Si el soporte se inclina a un lado, hace ruidos anormales, o parece inestable durante la utilizacin, compruebe y apriete todos los tornillos siguiendo las instrucciones de montaje anteriores.

7

C

157

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT!

This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class B digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environ- ment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices.

Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit OFF and ON, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures:

Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference.

Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s.

In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to co-axial type cable.

If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA CORPORATION OF AMERICA.

IMPORTANT NOTICE FOR THE UNITED KINGDOM

Connecting the Plug and Cord IMPORTANT. The wires in this mains lead are coloured in accordance with the following code:

BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured makings identifying the terminals in your plug proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

Making sure that neither core is connected to the earth terminal of the three pin plug.

This applies only to products distributed by Yamaha Canada Music Ltd. Ceci ne sapplique quaux produits distribus par Yamaha Canada Musique Lte.

CANADA THIS DIGITAL APPARATUS DOES NOT EXCEED THE CLASS B LIMITS FOR RADIO NOISE EMISSIONS FROM DIGITAL APPARA- TUS SET OUT IN THE RADIO INTERFERENCE REGULATION OF THE CANADIAN DEPARTMENT OF COMMUNICATIONS.

LE PRESENT APPAREIL NUMERIQUE NEMET PAS DE BRUITS RADIOELECTRIQUES DEPASSANT LES LIMITES APPLICABLES AUX APPAREILS NUMERIQUES DE LA CLASSE B PRESCRITES DANS LE REGLEMENT SUR LE BROUILLAGE RADIOELECTRIQUE EDICTE PAR LE MINISTERE DES COMMUNICATIONS DU CANADA.

CAUTION: TO PREVENT ELECTRIC SHOCK, MATCH WIDE BLADE OF PLUG TO WIDE SLOT, FULLY INSERT.

ATTENTION: POUR VITER LES CHOCS LECTRIQUES, INTRODUIRE LA LAME LA PLUS LARGE DE LA FICHE DANS LA BORNE CORRESPONDANTE DE LA PRISE ET POUSSER JUSQUAU FOND.

WARNING- When using any electrical or electronic prod- uct, basic precautions should always be followed. These pre- cautions include, but are not limited to, the following:

1. Read all Safety Instructions, Installation Instructions, Special Message Section items, and any Assembly Instructions found in this manual BEFORE marking any connections, in- cluding connection to the main supply.

2. Main Power Supply Verification: Yamaha products are manufactured specifically for the supply voltage in the area where they are to be sold. If you should move, or if any doubt exists about the supply voltage in your area, please contact your dealer for supply voltage verification and (if applicable) instructions. The required supply voltage is printed on the name plate. For name plate location, please refer to the graphic found in the Special Message Section of this manual.

3. This product may be equipped with a polarized plug (one blade wider than the other). If you are unable to insert the plug into the outlet, turn the plug over and try again. If the problem persists, contact an electrician to have the obsolete outlet replaced. Do NOT defeat the safety purpose of the plug.

4. Some electronic products utilize external power sup- plies or adapters. Do NOT connect this type of product to any power supply or adapter other than one described in the owners manual, on the name plate, or specifically recommended by Yamaha.

5. WARNING: Do not place this product or any other objects on the power cord or place it in a position where any- one could walk on, trip over, or roll anything over power or connecting cords of any kind. The use of an extension cord is not recommended! If you must use an extension cord, the minimum wire size for a 25' cord (or less) is 18 AWG. NOTE: The smaller the AWG number, the larger the current handling capacity. For longer extension cords, consult a local electri- cian.

6. Ventilation: Electronic products, unless specifically designed for enclosed installations, should be placed in loca- tions that do not interfere with proper ventilation. If instruc- tions for enclosed installations are not provided, it must be assumed that unobstructed ventilation is required.

7. Temperature considerations: Electronic products should be installed in locations that do not significantly contribute to their operating temperature. Placement of this product close to heat sources such as; radiators, heat registers and other devices that produce heat should be avoided.

8. This product was NOT designed for use in wet/damp loca- tions and should not be used near water or exposed to rain. Exam- ples of wet/damp locations are; near a swimming pool, spa, tub, sink, or wet basement.

9. This product should be used only with the components supplied or; a cart, rack, or stand that is recommended by the manufacturer. If a cart, rack, or stand is used, please observe all safety markings and instructions that accompany the accessory product.

10. The power supply cord (plug) should be disconnected from the outlet when electronic products are to be left unused for ex- tended periods of time. Cords should also be disconnected when there is a high probability of lightening and/or electrical storm activity.

11. Care should be taken that objects do not fall and liquids are not spilled into the enclosure through any openings that may exist.

12. Electrical/electronic products should be serviced by a qualified service person when:

a. The power supply cord has been damaged; or b. Objects have fallen, been inserted, or liquids have been

spilled into the enclosure through openings; or c. The product has been exposed to rain; or d. The product does not operate, exhibits a marked change

in performance; or e. The product has been dropped, or the enclosure of the

product has been damaged.

13. Do not attempt to service this product beyond that de- scribed in the user-maintenance instructions. All other servicing should be referred to qualified service personnel.

14. This product, either alone or in combination with an ampli- fier and headphones or speaker/s, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. DO NOT operate for a long period of time at a high volume level or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should consult an audiologist. IMPORTANT: The louder the sound, the shorter the time period before damage occurs.

15. Some Yamaha products may have benches and/or accessory mounting fixtures that are either supplied as a part of the product or as optional accessories. Some of these items are designed to be dealer assembled or installed Please make sure that benches are stable and any optional fixtures (where applicable) are well se- cured BEFORE using. Benches supplied by Yamaha are designed for seating only. No other uses are recommended.

INFORMATION RELATING TO PERSONAL INJURY, ELECTRICAL SHOCK, AND FIRE HAZARD POSSIBILITIES HAS BEEN INCLUDED IN THIS LIST.

IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS

92-469-2

PLEASE KEEP THIS MANUAL

M.D.G., EMI

Manualsnet FAQs

If you want to find out how the Clavinova Yamaha works, you can view and download the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual on the Manualsnet website.

Yes, we have the Owner's Manual for Yamaha Clavinova as well as other Yamaha manuals. All you need to do is to use our search bar and find the user manual that you are looking for.

The Owner's Manual should include all the details that are needed to use a Yamaha Clavinova. Full manuals and user guide PDFs can be downloaded from Manualsnet.com.

The best way to navigate the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual is by checking the Table of Contents at the top of the page where available. This allows you to navigate a manual by jumping to the section you are looking for.

This Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual consists of sections like Table of Contents, to name a few. For easier navigation, use the Table of Contents in the upper left corner.

You can download Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual free of charge simply by clicking the “download” button in the upper right corner of any manuals page. This feature allows you to download any manual in a couple of seconds and is generally in PDF format. You can also save a manual for later by adding it to your saved documents in the user profile.

To be able to print Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual, simply download the document to your computer. Once downloaded, open the PDF file and print the Yamaha Clavinova CVP-69 Piano Owner's Manual as you would any other document. This can usually be achieved by clicking on “File” and then “Print” from the menu bar.